JP7066470B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Patent Document 1, when the display mode of the hold display changes, a gaming machine that notifies by causing a lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the changed display mode has been proposed. Further, as shown in Patent Document 2, there has been proposed a gaming machine that clears the stored contents other than the set value when the setting change process is performed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-43099 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

There was room to enhance the commercial value of the gaming machine having the functions and configurations of both Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 .

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced commercial value .

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A game control means for controlling a game (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a process for controlling the progress of a game) and
A setting permission state control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process) that can control a setting permission state for setting a setting value (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3), and
Setting confirmation status control means that can control the setting confirmation status for confirming the set value, and
A plurality of light emitting means controlled by the game control means and showing display results of variable display according to a plurality of light emitting modes (for example, a first special symbol display device 109AK4A, a second special symbol display device 109AK4B, etc. constituting the information display device 109AK001). Multiple LEDs) and
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display) (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S161) and
Specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect in relation to the specific display displayed by the specific display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003AKS203) and
Equipped with
The plurality of light emitting means
When the power failure is restored, the light emission mode shows the display result of the variable display shown before the power failure recovery (for example, FIGS. 11-3 and 11-4).
In the setting permission state , it is a light emitting mode that is not normally used during the game, and is a special light emitting mode in which all of the plurality of light emitting means emit light (for example, FIG. 11-6 (C)).
After the end of the setting permission state, the light emission mode shows the same contents as the display result of the variable display shown after the power failure recovery (for example, FIG. 11-6 (D)).
In the setting confirmation state, the special light emission mode is common to that in the setting permission state.
The specific staging means includes a first staging means (for example, a first light emitting unit 003AKC1) and a second staging means (for example, a second light emitting unit 003AKC2).
As the specific effect, a first specific effect using the first effect means (for example, a specific effect of the first effect mode) and a second specific effect using the second effect means are used according to the ratio controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible to execute either an effect (for example, a specific effect of the second effect mode).
When the specific effect using one of the first effect means and the second effect means is executed in relation to one specific display, the first effect means and the said in relation to the other specific display. Restricting the execution of the specific effect using the other of the second effect means (for example, when it is determined in the specific effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-11 that the specific effect is being executed (step). 003AKS402; Yes), end the specific production determination process),
It is characterized by that.
Further, in order to achieve the above object, the other gaming machine is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display) (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S161) and
A specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect in relation to the specific display displayed by the specific display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003AKS203) and the like.
Equipped with
The specific staging means includes a first staging means (for example, a first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the like) and a second staging means (for example, a second light emitting unit 003AKC2 and the like).
A first specific effect (for example, in the first effect mode) in which only the first effect means of the first effect means and the second effect means is used as the specific effect according to the ratio controlled to the advantageous state. (Specific effect, etc.), a second specific effect using only the second effect means of the first effect means and the second effect means (for example, a specific effect of the second effect mode), and the first effect means. It is possible to execute either a third specific effect (for example, a specific effect of the third effect mode) using both the second effect means and the second effect means.
When either one of the first specific effect and the second specific effect is being executed as the specific effect related to the specific display, as the specific effect related to the other specific display, as the specific effect. When it is determined that the specific effect is being executed in the specific effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-11, the execution of the other of the first specific effect and the second specific effect is restricted (for example, (for example). Step 003AKS402; Yes), end the specific effect determination process),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying which specific display the specific effect is related to and deteriorating the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
It is possible to execute a plurality of effects related to the specific display (for example, a notice of hold display) displayed by the specific display means in the same period.
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to show that there are a plurality of opportunities to be given a game value advantageous to the player by the specific display, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
When the specific effect related to the specific display is being executed, the specific effect related to the other specific display is not executed until at least the variable display corresponding to the specific display is completed. (For example, when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, a specific effect related to another hold display is executed at a predetermined timing after the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is completed. To limit),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying which specific display the specific effect is related to and deteriorating the game interest.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
When the first specific effect is executed as the specific effect, the advantageous state is controlled at a lower rate than when the second specific effect is executed as the specific effect (for example, the specific effect is controlled in the first effect mode). When executed, the jackpot reliability and jackpot expectation are lower than when the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode).
The first effect means is provided so as to be easily recognized by the player as compared with the second effect means (for example, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 is provided so as to be easily recognized by the player as compared with the second light emitting unit 003AKC2).
You may do so.
With such a configuration, the player's attention can be suitably attracted.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The specific effect related to the specific display of one can be started before the variable display corresponding to the specific display of the one is started, and can be continued even after the variable display is started (for example). The specific effect related to the one hold display can be started before the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started, and can be continued even after the variable display is started).
The effect mode of the specific effect can be changed from one effect mode to another effect mode indicating that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the one effect mode (for example, a rank-up effect can be executed). ),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the staging control command which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the hold display data storage part, etc. which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pre-reading notice setting process which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hold display change determination process which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the hold display change pattern which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the specific effect determination process which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the rank-up effect pattern which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on a feature part 003AK. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process which is executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the specifications at each setting value. It is a timing chart showing the flow of various productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the continuation rate suggestion production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the continuation rate suggestion effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the hold continuous production decision table and the hold continuous production time production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hold continuous production process. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion effect determination table of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect processing. It is a figure which shows the information display device which concerns on a feature part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the RAM clear state at the time of startup which concerns on a feature part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the display operation example of the information display device which concerns on a feature part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the display operation example of the information display device which concerns on a feature part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the display operation example of the information display device which concerns on a feature part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the display operation example of the information display device which concerns on a feature part 109AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counting effect setting process which concerns on a feature part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in the counting effect setting process which concerns on a feature part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in the counting effect setting process which concerns on a feature part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the effect content of the counting effect which concerns on a feature part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on a feature part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on a feature part 110AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained and a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the effect mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) gives a staging control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The staging control board 12 is equipped with a staging control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the staging control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not the detection signal is received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S2).
1). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special figure game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the staging control board 12. In the staging control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. here,
When the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the staging control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the staging control board 12 will be described. In the staging control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the staging control CPU 120 is activated to execute the staging control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the staging control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various staging devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the staging operation using various staging devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the staging control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the staging control process process in step S76, the staging random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the staging random numbers used on the side of the staging control board 12 is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illuminated signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect process ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The big hit middle effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature unit 003AK)
Hereinafter, the feature unit 003AK according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 8-1 shows a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the feature unit 003AK. An active display area 003AKA1 is provided on the screen of the image display device 5. In the active display area 003AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution.

Further, a first hold display area 003AKB1 and a second hold display area 003AKB2 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5. In the present embodiment, the hold display can be displayed in the first hold display area 003AKB1 and the second hold display area 003AKB2 as a specific display notifying the opportunity to give a game value advantageous to the player. Specifically, in the first hold display area 003AKB1, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held, according to the first hold storage number. In the second hold display area 003AKB2, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held, according to the second hold storage number. The hold display in the first hold display area 003AKB1 is also referred to as "first hold display", and the hold display in the second hold display area 003AKB2 is also referred to as "second hold display".

In the first hold display area 003AKB1, for example, the display area may be configured so that the first hold display is performed right-justified. In the first hold display area 003AKB1, four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the first hold storage number "4" are provided, and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the right end. , "4" may be associated with it. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening, the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game increases. At this time, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display area 003AKB1, the increased first hold is displayed at the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first hold display area 003AKB1. As a hold display corresponding to the number of stored items, a display of an effect image showing a new first hold display is added. If there is another 1st hold display in the 1st hold display area 003AKB1, the display is hidden to the left of the display part where the other 1st hold display is performed in the 1st hold display area 003AKB1. A staging image showing a new first hold display as a hold display corresponding to the increased first hold storage number at the part (display part corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). Add a display. When there is one or more first hold displays in the first hold display area 003AKB1 and a new first special figure game is started, the hold number corresponds to "1" in the first hold display area 003AKB1. The first hold display is erased (digested) at the rightmost display site. At this time, if there is a first hold display in the display part corresponding to other hold numbers "2" to "4", those first hold displays are moved to the right side in the direction of the erased display part ( Shift). As described above, in the first hold display area 003AKB1, the first hold display corresponding to the first special figure game whose execution is held without being started is possible according to the first hold storage number.

In the second hold display area 003AKB2, for example, the display area may be configured so that the second hold display is performed left-justified. In the second hold display area 003AKB2, four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the second hold storage number "4" are provided, and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the left end. , "4" may be associated with it. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start winning opening, the number of second reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game increases. At this time, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display area 003AKB2, the increased second hold is displayed at the leftmost display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second hold display area 003AKB2. As a hold display corresponding to the number of stored items, a display of an effect image showing a new second hold display is added. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display area 003AKB2, the display is hidden to the right of the display part where the other second hold display is performed in the second hold display area 003AKB2. A staging image showing a new second hold display as a hold display corresponding to the increased second hold storage number at the part (display part corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). Add a display. When there is one or more second hold displays in the second hold display area 003AKB2 and a new second special figure game is started, the hold number corresponds to "1" in the second hold display area 003AKB2. The second hold display is erased (digested) at the leftmost display site. At this time, if there is a second hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4", those second hold displays are moved to the left side in the direction of the erased display part ( Shift). As described above, in the second hold display area 003AKB2, the second hold display corresponding to the second special figure game whose execution is held without being started is possible according to the second hold storage number.

In the active display area 003AKA1, in response to the start of the first special figure game, the active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display area 003AKAB1 is started. Further, in the active display area 003AKA1, in response to the start of the second special figure game, the active display corresponding to the second reserved display erased (digested) in the second reserved display area 003AKAB2 is started. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display may have the same color and pattern. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display and the second hold display. There may be. If the display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display has changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode due to the change of the hold display described later, the display mode after the change is also in the active display. Taken over. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect.

On the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 003AKA1 is arranged between the first reserved display area 003AKAB1 and the second reserved display area 003AKB2. On the other hand, the active display area 003AKA1, the first reserved display area 003AKAB1, and the second reserved display area 003AKAB2 may be arranged at arbitrary positions on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the arrangement of the active display area 003AKA1 may not be changed, and the first reserved display area 003AKB1 and the second reserved display area 003AKAB2 may be interchanged and arranged.

In the present embodiment, the hold display notice is configured to be executable as an effect related to the hold display which is a specific display. As an example of the look-ahead notice effect, the hold display notice is at least one of the first hold displays in the first hold display area 003AKB1 or at least one of the second hold displays in the second hold display area 003AKB2. By changing the display mode to a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, it is announced that the variable display corresponding to the hold display will be "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and will be controlled to the big hit game state. The change in the hold display in the hold display notice is also referred to as "change in hold display". Due to the change in the hold display, the display color of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started is changed to a specific color (for example, blue, green, red, gold, etc.) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) in the normal time. By making it possible to recognize changes in the display mode of the hold display, it is sufficient to suggest that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio. Alternatively, by changing the display pattern in the hold display to a specific pattern (for example, Sakura pattern) different from the predetermined pattern (for example, plain) in the normal time, the expectation that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" is normal. It may be possible to suggest that it is higher than. Alternatively, by setting the display mode to show a predetermined message (for example, "chance", "heat", "extreme heat", etc.) as the hold display, the expectation that the display result of the variable display will be "big hit" is increased. You may be able to suggest that you are there.

In this embodiment, a plurality of hold display notices can be executed in the same period. Specifically, while the hold display notice related to one hold display is being executed, the hold display notice related to another hold display may be executed.

The game board 2 is provided with a first light emitting unit 003AKC1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a second light emitting unit 003AKC2. The first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 are provided with light emitting means such as a lamp and an LED, and can emit light. Note that FIG. 8-1 shows a state in which both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 are emitting light.

The first light emitting unit 003AKC1 which is the first effect means is provided so as to be more easily recognized by the player than the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 which is the second effect means. Specifically, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 provided on the game board 2 in which the image display device 5 is arranged is the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 provided on the game machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. Compared to the above, the image display device 5 is provided closer to the image display device 5 that the player is paying attention to almost all the time during the game. Therefore, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 is more likely to be guided by the player's line of sight than the second light emitting unit 003AKC2, and the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 is more likely to be recognized by the player than the second light emitting unit 003AKC2.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect can be executed in relation to the hold display which is the specific display. The specific effect is executed by causing (using) at least one of the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 which is the first effect means and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 which is the second effect means. Specifically, the specific effect includes a first effect mode in which only the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 of the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emits light, and the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2. Of these, the second effect mode in which only the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emits light and the third effect mode in which both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emit light are executed. .. The jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation differ depending on which of the first, second, and third effects modes the specific effect is performed (as an advantageous state at different rates). It is controlled to the jackpot game state). Specifically, when the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are lower than when the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode (advantageous state at a low rate). It is controlled to the jackpot game state as). When the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are lower than when the specific effect is executed in the third effect mode. Therefore, the player can recognize the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state based on the effect mode of the specific effect. That is, the specific effect is an effect that suggests the ratio controlled by the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state. As described above, the specific effect of the first effect mode has lower jackpot reliability and jackpot expectation than the specific effect of the second effect mode or the third effect mode, but is lower than the second light emitting unit 003AKC2. It is executed by using the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 provided so as to be easily recognized by the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and preferably attract the attention of the player. More specifically, since the fact that the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 provided so as to be easily recognized by the player is used for the production itself arouses the expectations of the player, even if the production (specific production of the first production mode) is performed. Even if the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are low, the player's expectation can be maintained, the player's attention can be appropriately attracted, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the specific effect related to the one hold display, the display mode of the one hold display, which is the timing before the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started, is the hold display. It starts from the timing changed by the change, and then continues even after the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started. In other words, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed as an example of the look-ahead advance notice effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed in relation to (corresponding to) the change in the hold display. In the present embodiment, the specific effect related to the one hold display ends at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the one hold display ends.

In the present embodiment, during the execution of the specific effect, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed from one effect mode to another effect mode having higher jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation than the one effect mode. It is configured so that the up effect can be executed. Specifically, when the rank-up effect is executed in the present embodiment, the specific effect related to the one hold display is changed from the timing when the display mode of the one hold display changes due to the change in the hold display. After starting in the effect mode of, it continues even after the variable display corresponding to the hold display is started, and during the execution of the variable display, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed from the one effect mode. , Change to another production mode in which the jackpot reliability or the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the one production mode.

As described above, a plurality of hold display notices may be executed in the same period. In the present embodiment, when the specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to the other hold display is restricted from being executed. That is, when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, even if the hold display notice related to the other hold display is executed and the display mode of the other hold display changes due to the change in the hold display. Restricts the execution of specific effects related to the other hold display. In the hold display notice, the player does not misunderstand which hold display was executed in relation to the hold display notice, whereas in the specific effect, the specific effect is executed in relation to which hold display. There is a risk that the player will misunderstand whether or not the game has been done, and the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the specific effect is executed in relation to any hold display by restricting the execution of the specific effect related to the other hold display. Prevents the player from misidentifying the game and suppresses the decline in the game's interest.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, a plurality of specific effects related to the other hold display are restricted from being executed. The hold display notice may be executed in the same period. That is, when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to one hold display is executed while restricting the execution of the specific effect related to the other hold display. If so, the hold display notices related to other hold displays are not restricted. This is because, as described above, in the specific effect, the player may misunderstand which hold display the specific effect was executed in connection with, and the game interest may be reduced. This is because the player does not misunderstand which hold display is related to the hold display notice.

FIG. 8-2 shows a configuration example of an effect control command used as a start opening winning command for the feature unit 003AK. In the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating the occurrence of the start winning is made. As an effect control command for designating the occurrence of a start prize, a start mouth prize designation command is prepared in advance. Further, in the start winning determination process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for specifying the number of reserved storages is made. A hold storage number notification command is prepared in advance as an effect control command for specifying the hold storage number. Further, in the start winning determination process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for specifying a determination result of the look-ahead determination is made. As an effect control command for designating the judgment result of the look-ahead judgment, a winning judgment result command is prepared in advance.

FIG. 8-2 (A) shows a setting example of a start opening winning designation command, a hold storage number notification command, and a winning determination result command. The start opening winning designation command includes a command B100H which is a first starting opening winning designation command and a command B200H which is a second starting opening winning designation command. The subscript H indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The hold storage number notification command includes a command C1XXH which is a first hold storage number notification command and a command C2XXH which is a second hold storage number notification command. It should be noted that XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the hold storage number notification command, different EXT data (for example, any of 00H to 04H) is set according to the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number. The winning determination result command may be the command C4XXH including a value set according to the determination result of the look-ahead determination.

When a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, the first reserved memory number is stored. When it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached, the first starting condition is satisfied. The first start condition is a condition for executing a special figure game (first special figure game) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the first start opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the first reserved storage number notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. When a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, the second reserved memory number The second starting condition is satisfied when it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached. The second start condition is a condition for executing a special figure game (second special figure game) using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the second start opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the second reserved storage number notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12.

On the side of the staging control board 12, the establishment of the first starting condition can be detected by receiving the first starting opening winning designation command, and the establishment of the second starting condition can be detected by receiving the second starting opening winning designation command. can. As described above, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The winning determination result command is at the time of the first start winning, which is the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening, or at the time of detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening. At the time of the second start winning, the comparison result (decision result at the time of winning) using the game random number (random number value for determining the special figure display result, etc.) extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like is sent to the side of the staging control board 12. Notice. The first reserved storage number notification command notifies the first special figure reserved storage number. The second reserved storage number notification command notifies the second special figure reserved storage number.

FIG. 8-2 (B) illustrates the content of the notification by the winning determination result command. Of the winning judgment result commands, commands C402H, command C403H, and command C404H may be transmitted when the random number value for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot judgment range, and the display result of the special figure game is displayed. By being determined to be "missing", the winning judgment result that the jackpot game state is not controlled is notified. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state by determining the display result of the special figure game as "big hit". Notify the winning judgment result (variable display content is "big hit"). The command C400H notifies that the winning determination is restricted. The command C402H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach determination range at the time of loss, and the determination result at the time of winning (variable display content is determined to be the fluctuation pattern with super reach at the time of loss). "Super reach confirmed at the time of loss") is notified. On the other hand, the command C403H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of loss, and the determination result at the time of winning (variable) is determined to be the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect at the time of loss. The displayed content notifies "reach confirmed when lost"). Further, the command C404H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range, and it is possible that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect is not determined. Notify the time judgment result (variable display content is "general when lost"). In this way, the winning judgment result command uses the game random numbers extracted at the time of starting winning, and whether or not the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" or whether or not it is determined in a specific fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted as judgment result information for notifying the judgment result at the time of winning.

FIG. 8-3 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern relating to the feature unit 003AK. These variation patterns may be prepared in advance so as to be usable in place of a part or all of the variation patterns in the above embodiment, or together with a part or all of the variation patterns in the above embodiment. The plurality of fluctuation patterns differ in the variable display mode of the special figure fluctuation time and the decorative symbol. The special figure fluctuation time is the time required from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game such as the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The plurality of fluctuation patterns related to the feature unit 003AK include fluctuation patterns corresponding to any one of "non-reach", "reach", and "big hit". "Non-reach" is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "non-reach loss". "Reach" is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination that is not the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss". The "big hit" is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to "non-reach" is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach" is a reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "big hit" is a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are also collectively referred to as a loss fluctuation pattern.

The plurality of fluctuation patterns related to the feature unit 003AK include a fluctuation pattern capable of executing one to three pseudo-ream fluctuations as a pseudo-ream effect. Pseudo-continuous variation is a variable display that is resumed after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. When the pseudo-continuous variation is executed, for example, the variable display may be temporarily stopped by the temporary stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in a temporary stop mode different from the case where the pseudo-continuous variation is not executed. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the variable display may be temporarily stopped in a temporary stop mode that the player can recognize, or the variable display may be temporarily stopped in a temporary stop mode that is difficult for the player to recognize (instantaneous stop, etc.). ) May be used. Alternatively, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is continuously executed, while the display of the effect image in the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, corresponding to the predetermined continuation mode. Depending on the sound output by 8R, the lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the operation of the movable member, or a combination of some or all of these, the variable display in which all the symbols change is repeated or continued. You may notify that it will be executed. In the variable display that changes all the symbols, the decorative symbols are changed at high speed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R that are "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5. Includes variable display.

Among the plurality of variation patterns related to the feature unit 003AK, for example, the variation pattern PA1-4 is a variation pattern capable of executing a pseudo-continuous effect including one pseudo-continuous variation corresponding to “non-reach”. The variation patterns PA2-2 and PB2-2 are variation patterns capable of executing a pseudo-continuous effect including one pseudo-continuous variation corresponding to the “reach”. The fluctuation patterns PA2-3 and PB2-3 are fluctuation patterns capable of executing a pseudo-ream effect including two pseudo-ream fluctuations corresponding to the "reach". The variation pattern PB2-4 is a variation pattern capable of executing a pseudo-continuous effect including three pseudo-continuous variations corresponding to the “reach”. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA3-2 and PB3-2 are fluctuation patterns capable of executing a pseudo-ream effect including one pseudo-ream variation corresponding to the "big hit". The fluctuation patterns PA3-3 and PB3-3 are fluctuation patterns capable of executing a pseudo-ream effect including two pseudo-ream fluctuations corresponding to the "big hit". The variation pattern PB3-4 is a variation pattern capable of executing a pseudo-continuous effect including three pseudo-continuous variations corresponding to the “big hit”.

8-4 and 8-5 show a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table for the feature unit 003AK. FIG. 8-4 (A) shows the fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT1 corresponding to the normal time loss, and FIG. 8-4 (B) shows the fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT2 corresponding to the time saving and medium loss. FIG. 8-5 shows the fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT3 corresponding to the jackpot. The normal time loss is a case where the display result of the variable display becomes "loss" in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed. The time reduction middle loss is a case where the display result of the variable display becomes "loss" during the time reduction during the time reduction control. In the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, when the time reduction control is not performed in the normal time, or when the time reduction control is performed, the time reduction is performed. Or, depending on the case of "big hit", the variation pattern is determined using the determination table selected from the variation pattern determination tables 003AKT1 to 003AKT3. When determining the variation pattern, numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the variation pattern is read from the random number buffer for variation. The random number buffer for variation can store the extracted random number value when the start winning determination process is executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. The effect control CPU 120 compares the random number value for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation with the determination value preset in the selected variation pattern determination table. Then, among the ranges of the determination values assigned for each variation pattern, the variation pattern to be used is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random number value for determining the variation pattern. It should be noted that, by a process separate from the determination of the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the reach mode is adopted in the case of “loss”.

The first reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the first special figure, is 0, 1, or 2 or more for the plurality of fluctuation patterns to which the determination value is assigned in the variation pattern determination table 003AKT1. A variation pattern is included in which the number of assigned determination values differs depending on whether the value is. With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be made different according to the first reserved storage number. When the first reserved storage number is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time (special figure variation time) is shorter than when the first reserved storage number is less than the predetermined value. It suffices if a judgment value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that

In the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the table is the same as when the first reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the second reserved storage number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the data. Alternatively, regardless of the second reserved storage number when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the variation pattern is referred to by referring to the table data according to the first reserved storage number at that time. A decision may be made. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT1 is executed regardless of the second reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data to which the determination value is assigned differently. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the "first hold storage number" in the fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT1 is read as "second hold storage number", and the second hold storage number is read. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the above.

In the variation pattern determination table 003AKT2, there is a variation pattern in which the number of assigned determination values differs depending on which value the second reserved storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. It suffices if the average variable display time (special symbol fluctuation time) of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be made different according to the second reserved storage number. When the second reserved storage number is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time can be shorter than when the second reserved storage number is less than the predetermined value. It suffices if the judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table 003AKT2, the number of determination values assigned to the variation pattern having a shorter special map variation time than the variation pattern with a long special map variation time is larger than that of the variation pattern determination table 003AKT1. It suffices if a determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. As a result, it is sufficient that the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be shortened when the time reduction control is performed during the time reduction, as compared with the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed.

During the time reduction control, the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening, and the special figure game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is shortened. It is highly likely that it will be executed, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. Then, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the table is the same as when the second reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the first reserved storage number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the data. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data in which the allocation of the determination value is different from that of the variation pattern determination table 003AKT2 regardless of the number of first reserved storages. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the "second hold storage number" in the fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT2 is read as "first hold storage number", and the first hold storage number is obtained. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the above.

In the variation pattern determination table 003AKT3, the number of determination values assigned to the variation pattern with a reach effect that becomes super reach, such as variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, is such as variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3. , Judgment values are assigned to each variation pattern so as to be larger than the number of determination values assigned to the variation patterns accompanied by the reach effect of normal reach. In the fluctuation pattern determination tables 003AKT1 and 003AKT2, the number of determination values assigned to the fluctuation patterns with the reach effect that becomes the normal reach, such as the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, is the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-4. Judgment values are assigned to each variation pattern so as to be larger than the number of determination values assigned to the variation patterns accompanied by the reach effect that becomes super reach. As a result, when the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the reach effect that becomes the super reach is not executed even if the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed, and the variable display is displayed. The jackpot reliability and jackpot expectation are higher than when the display result is stopped and displayed.

The determination values assigned to the plurality of variation patterns to which the determination values are assigned in the variation pattern determination tables 003AKT1 to 003AKT3 are determined according to whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the number of times the pseudo-continuous variation is executed. Fluctuation patterns with different numbers of are included. The number of judgment values assigned to the reach variation pattern is the largest when the pseudo-ream effect is not executed, decreases as the number of executions of the pseudo-ream variation in the pseudo-ream effect increases, and is two pseudo-reams in the case of normal reach. It is the least when the variation is executed, and the least when the pseudo-continuous variation is executed three times in the case of super reach. If the number of judgment values assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern is normal reach, two pseudo-continuous fluctuations are executed than when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed and when one pseudo-continuous variation is executed. In the case of super reach, it is the least when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and it increases as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation in the pseudo-continuous effect increases, and when the pseudo-continuous variation is executed three times. Will be the most. With such a setting, it is possible to make the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation different depending on whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the number of times the pseudo-continuous variation is executed. When the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern so that the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. In addition, when the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is larger than the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation in the pseudo-continuous production, a judgment value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher. It suffices if it is done. The jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation differ depending on whether or not the pseudo-ream effect is executed, and if it is executed, the number of times the pseudo-ream variation is executed. Therefore, the pseudo-ream effect gives the player an expectation that is controlled by the jackpot game state as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, depending on the presence or absence of the pseudo-ream effect and the number of executions of the pseudo-ream variation. Can be suggested. In this respect, the pseudo-continuous staging is included in the preliminary staging that foretells that it will be controlled in an advantageous state.

FIG. 8-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the hold display data storage unit for the feature unit 003AK. The hold display data storage unit may be provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, an effect control buffer setting unit). The hold display data storage unit is the first in the first hold display area 003AKB1 in response to the fact that the execution of the first special figure game is held and the execution of the second special figure game is held. Various data for performing the hold display and various data for performing the second hold display in the second hold display area 003AKB2 are stored as hold display data. As the hold display data storage unit, a first hold display data storage unit corresponding to the hold storage display of the first special figure game and a second hold display data storage unit corresponding to the hold storage display of the second special figure game are provided. It suffices if it is done. In the hold display data storage unit, for example, in order to store data that can identify the winning determination result, the hold display image, and the final display image in association with the hold numbers in the first hold display area 003AKB1 and the second hold display 003AKB2. Storage area is secured. The hold display data storage unit uses a part or all of the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer (for example, the storage area of the winning judgment result command), or the first starting winning command buffer. And it may be configured as a storage unit separate from the second start winning command buffer.

The winning determination result that can be stored by the hold display data indicates the determination result of the look-ahead determination specified based on the winning determination result command. The winning judgment result specified based on the winning judgment result command includes "big hit", "super reach confirmed at the time of loss", "reach confirmed at the time of losing", and "general at the time of losing". When the winning judgment result of "big hit" is notified by the winning judgment result command, it is specified that the display result of the variable display which is the judgment target is "big hit". When any of "Loss time super reach confirmation", "Loss time reach confirmation", and "Loss time general" is notified by the winning judgment result command, the display result of the variable display that is the judgment target is "Loss". Is specified. The hold display image that can be stored by the hold display data is displayed in the first hold display area 003AKB1 and the second hold display area 003AKB2, so that the presence / absence of a special figure game that has not been started and the number of holds can be recognized. It is a production image. The final display image that can be stored by the hold display data is an effect image for hold display that is finally displayed in the first hold display area 003AKB1 or the second hold display area 003AKB2.

8-6 (B1) to (B5) show a plurality of staging images that can be used for the hold display and the active display of the feature unit 003AK. In this embodiment, five display images 003AKD0 to 003AKD4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for hold display and active display. The number of display images that can be used for hold display and active display is not limited to five, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 003AKD0 is an effect image when a round plain white display is performed. The display image 003AKD1 is an effect image when a round plain blue display is performed. The display image 003AKD2 is an effect image when a round plain green display is performed. The display image 003AKD3 is an effect image in the case of displaying a round solid color in red. The display image 003AKD4 is an effect image when a round plain gold display is performed. The normal display mode in the hold display and the active display is a round plain white display.

In the hold display notice, there is a case where the display color of the hold display is blue, green, red, or gold. Of these, when the display color is red or gold, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than when the display color is blue or green.

FIG. 8-7 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of the staging control process process as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the look-ahead notice setting process, it is determined whether or not the command at the time of winning the start opening has been received (step 003AKS101). The start opening winning command includes a starting opening winning designation command, a hold storage number notification command, and a winning determination result command. In step 003AKS101, for example, it is confirmed whether or not the start opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer. By doing so, it may be determined whether or not a command has been received at the time of starting winning.

If no command is received in step 003AKS101 (step 003AKS101; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command has been received (step 003AKS101; Yes), the content of the notification by the received command is specified (step 003AKS102). For example, the winning judgment result is specified as the notification content by the winning judgment result command. Subsequently, the final display image is determined (step 003AKS103). The final display image is an effect image that is finally displayed as the first hold display or the second hold display. The effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number value for determining the final display image, and based on the random number value, refers to the final display image determination table according to the winning determination result specified by step 003AKS102. The display image may be determined. After that, after setting the update of the hold display at the time of the start winning (step 003AKS104), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. The stored contents in the hold display data storage unit may be updated according to the update setting of the hold display at the time of starting winning. At this time, it is determined by the winning judgment result specified from the winning judgment result command, the display image 003AKD0 in the case of displaying white as the initial holding display image, and step 003AKS103 at the head of the free area in the hold display data storage unit. The final display image may be stored by storing the hold display data that can be identified.

FIG. 8-7 (B) shows a configuration example of the final display image determination table 003AKT4. In step 003AKS103 of the pre-reading notice setting process, it is sufficient that the final display image can be determined by referring to the final display image determination table 003AKT4. In the final display image determination table 003AKT4, a determination value which is a numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining the final display image may be assigned to the determination result of the final display image according to the determination result at the time of winning. The final display image determination table 003AKT4 is configured with table data so that the final display image to which the determination value is assigned differs depending on the determination result at the time of winning. As a result, the jackpot reliability and jackpot expectation, which are the reliability and expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state, differ depending on which of the displayed images 003AKD0 to 003AKD4 is the final display image. More specifically, the determination result that the final display image is the display image 003AKD0 is assigned more judgment values when the judgment result at the time of winning is other than "big hit" than when the judgment result is "big hit". , It becomes easier to determine when the judgment result at the time of winning is other than "big hit". On the other hand, in the determination result that the final display image is the display image 003AKD4, more judgment values are assigned when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit" than when it is other than "big hit". It becomes easier to determine when the judgment result at the time of winning is a "big hit". Therefore, when the final display image is the display image 003AKD4, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than when the display image is 003AKD0. According to the same comparison regarding the number of judgment values assigned to the display image to be the final display image, when the final display image is the display image 003AKD4, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot are higher than when the final display image is the display image 003AKD3. Expectations are high. When the final display image is the display image 003AKD3, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than when the display image is 003AKD2. When the final display image is the display image 003AKD2, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than when the display image is 003AKD1. When the final display image is the display image 003AKD1, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than when the display image is 003AKD0.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process for the feature unit 003AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol is determined (step 003AKS201). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. You just have to decide. The variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are mainly used by setting the transmission of the command at the start of variation of the special symbol when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern determined as a usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result determined by using a random value for determining a special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is displayed. It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the confirmed decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "miss". It becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 stops the different (mismatched) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the left confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for right-determined symbol determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right confirmed decorative symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the same (matching) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and prepares the left / right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop display in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right" on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, if the fixed decoration symbol becomes a big hit combination, for example, when the symbol number of the middle fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium-determined decorative symbol, the confirmed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 has "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 Determines decorative symbols with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probable change (big hit)", and whether or not the big hit medium promotion effect is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine whether the decorative symbol (decorative symbol to be shown) or the probabilistic symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the definite decorative symbol. In the big hit middle promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probable change big hit combination) that reminds the big hit but does not remind the probability change state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then the big hit game state or the big hit game state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probable change state is reached at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the big hit middle promotion effect even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the fixed decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the definite decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the big hit middle promotion effect from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", in step 003AKS201, it is decided whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect. You may be broken. In the re-lottery effect, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state by temporarily displaying the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The player can recognizely notify that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying (re-variating) the decorative symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. In some cases, the decorative symbol of the non-probable change jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol is re-variated by the re-lottery effect, so that it is not notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probable change state. When it is determined in step 003AKS201 to execute the re-lottery effect, the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After the final stop symbol and the like are determined in step 003AKS201, the hold display change determination process (step 003AKS202) and the specific effect determination process (step 003AKS203) are executed in order. Subsequently, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step 003AKS204). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and uses the effect control pattern 120. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (hold display change effect control pattern) in response to the execution setting of the hold display change by the hold display change determination process in step 003AKS202. It may be set as a usage pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (specific effect control patterns) in response to the execution setting of the specific effect by the specific effect determination process of step 003AKS203, and sets it as a pattern to be used. You may. In the specific effect determination process of step 003AKS203, the execution setting of the rank-up effect may be performed. Corresponding to the execution setting of such a rank-up effect, one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (rank-up effect control pattern) may be selected and set as a usage pattern. It should be noted that the special effect time effect control pattern, the hold display change effect control pattern, the specific effect control pattern, and the rank-up effect control pattern are not limited to those in which a separate effect control pattern is set, and a combination of execution settings of each effect is used. The staging control pattern of 1 corresponding to the above may be set.

When the staging control pattern is determined by step 003AKS204, for example, the initial staging control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (such as the staging control timer setting unit) corresponding to the staging pattern specified by the staging pattern designation command. Set the value (step 003AKS205). Then, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the variation of the decorative pattern or the like (step 003AKS206). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 003AKS204 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After setting the variable start in step 003AKS206, the hold display such as the first hold display in the first hold display area 003AKB1 and the second hold display in the second hold display area 003AKB2 corresponds to the start of the variable display. Make settings for updating and so on (step 003AKS207). For example, when the first special figure game is executed (started), in the first hold display area 003AKA1, the display part corresponding to the hold number "1" (the display part at the right end) is moved to the active display area 003AKA1. It is (shifted) and displayed as an active display, and the first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the right. On the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed (started), in the second hold display area 003AKAB2, the display part corresponding to the hold number "1" (the display part at the left end) is moved to the active display area 003AKA1. It is (shifted) and displayed as an active display, and the second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. The stored contents of the hold display data storage unit may be shifted in accordance with the shift of the hold display.

If both the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are "0" and the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize or the second starting winning prize, the first is The setting for updating the active display in the active display area 003AKA1 may be made without updating the 1 hold display or the second hold display. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may start the active display, which is a round plain and white display, in the active display area 003AKA1 as a normal display mode in the active display. After updating the hold display or the like by step 003AKS207, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step 003AKS208), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated. ..

FIG. 8-9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 003AKS202 of the variable display start setting process as the hold display change determination process. In the hold display change setting process, first, the hold display data storage content is confirmed (step 003AKS301). The hold display data storage content is, for example, data indicating a winning determination result, a hold display image, a final display image, etc., which are stored in association with each of the hold numbers "1" to "4" in the hold display data storage unit. It is the contents of. The hold display image is specified as a pre-change image displayed before the execution of the hold display change due to the hold display notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the hold display (step 003AKS302). At this time, it is determined as either "with change" or "without change" to execute the hold display change, based on, for example, the pre-change image or the final display image. More specifically, the pre-change image and the final display image are compared, and if the pre-change image and the final display image are the same display image, it is decided that there is no change in the hold display change. Just do it. When the image before the change is a display image different from the final display image and the hold number is "1", it may be determined as "changed" to execute the hold display change. When the image before change is a display image different from the final display image and the hold number is not "1" (normal time), a random number value for determining the hold display change is extracted and based on the random number value. , "There is a change" or "No change" may be determined by referring to the hold display change presence / absence determination table according to the winning determination result specified by step 003AKS301. Even if the pre-change image and the final display image are the same display image, the hold display notice can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and the hold display display mode does not change even if the notice effect is executed. You may do so. However, even in this case, if the final display image is the display image 003AKD4 (the display color is gold), the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation cannot be further increased, so that the hold display change is not executed. To decide.

Based on the determination result of step 003AKS302, it is determined whether or not it is determined to be "changed" (step 003AKS303). When it is determined that "there is no change" instead of "there is a change" (step 003AKS303; No), the hold display change determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that "there is a change" (step 003AKS303; Yes), it is determined whether or not the hold number is "1" (step 003AKS304). When it is determined that the hold number is not "1" (step 003AKS304; No), the hold display change pattern is determined by a random number lottery (step 003AKS305). The hold display change pattern is an effect pattern in which the execution timing and effect mode of the hold display change that is a hold display notice can be specified, and if a plurality of patterns are stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 in advance and prepared. good. The effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number value for determining the pending display change pattern, and refers to the pending display change pattern determination table according to the pre-change image and the final display image specified by step 003AKS301 based on the random number value. By doing so, the hold display change pattern may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number is "1" (step 003AKS304; No), the hold display change pattern that changes from the pre-change image to the final display image is determined among the hold display change patterns. (Step 003AKS307). After that, the determination result is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 003AKS306), and then the hold display change determination process is terminated.

FIG. 8-9 (B) shows a configuration example of the hold display change presence / absence determination table 003AKT5. In step 003AKS305 of the hold display change determination process, when the pre-change image is a display image different from the final display image and the hold number is not "1" (normal time), the winning determination result is specified and the hold display is displayed. By referring to the hold display change presence / absence determination table 003AKT5 based on the random value for change determination, it is sufficient that the presence / absence of the hold display change can be determined. In the hold display change presence / absence determination table 003AKT5, the judgment value, which is a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the hold display change, is executed as "no change" without executing the hold display change, depending on the judgment result at the time of winning. It suffices if it is assigned to the decision result of "changed". The table data of the hold display change presence / absence determination table 003AKT5 is configured so that the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of "no change" or "changed" is different depending on the determination result at the time of winning. As a result, the jackpot reliability and jackpot expectation differ depending on whether or not the hold display change has been executed. In particular, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", more judgment values are assigned to the judgment result of "changed" than in the case other than "big hit", so the rate at which the hold display change is executed. Will be higher. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold display in which the hold display change is executed, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than in the variable display corresponding to the hold display in which the hold display is not executed.

FIG. 8-10 (A) shows a setting example of the hold display change pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a plurality of hold display change patterns, hold display change patterns 003AKE01 to 003AKE04, 003AKE12 to 003AKE14, 003AKE23, 003AKE24, and 003AKE34 are prepared in advance. The plurality of hold display change patterns correspond to the combination of the hold display display image (pre-change image) before the hold display change is executed and the hold display display image (post-change image) after the hold display change is executed. ing. For example, the hold display change pattern 003AKE01 is used when the image before change is the display image 003AKD0 and the image after the change becomes the display image 003AKD1 due to the change in the hold display. In addition, as a hold display change pattern, a pattern for executing a ghost effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change even if the hold display notice is executed may be prepared. Further, different hold display change patterns may be prepared depending on the execution timing of the hold display change.

FIG. 8-10 (B) shows a configuration example of the hold display change pattern determination table 003AKT6. In step 003AKS305 of the hold display change determination process, the hold display change pattern may be determined by referring to the hold display change pattern determination table 003AKT6 based on the pre-change image and the final display image. In the hold display change pattern determination table 003AKT6, the determination value, which is a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the hold display change pattern according to the combination of the image before change and the final display image, is the determination result of the hold display change pattern. It suffices if it is assigned to. In the hold display change pattern determination table 003AKT6, the table data may be configured so that the hold display change pattern to which the determination value is assigned differs depending on the combination of the pre-change image and the final display image. As described above, among the display images 003AKD0 to 003AKD4, when the display image 003AKD4 is the final display image, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are the highest, and the jackpot reliability increases as the display images become 003AKD3, 003AKD2, and 003AKD1. When the degree and the jackpot expectation are lowered and the display image 003AKD0 is the final display image, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are the lowest. According to the structure of the table data in the hold display change pattern determination table 003AKT6, the hold display change pattern for changing to a display image having higher jackpot reliability and jackpot expectation than the display image to be the final display image is determined. There is no. As a result, even if the hold display change is executed and the hold display changes to a display color with high jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation, and then the hold display change is further executed, the hold display remains the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation. Since there is no downfall that changes to a low display color, it is possible to prevent the once raised expectation of the player from being impaired by the downturn of the hold display.

FIG. 8-11 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 003AKS203 of the variable display start setting process as the specific effect determination process. In the specific effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold display change is executed in response to the variable display this time (step 003AKS401). The effect control CPU 120 "holds" the hold display change is executed when the determination result (information indicating the hold display change pattern, etc.) for executing the hold display change is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. If it is determined that there is a display change and such a determination result is not stored, it may be determined that the hold display change is not executed and that there is no hold display change. In the case of "no change in hold display" (step 003AKS401; No), the specific effect determination process is terminated.

In the case of "with hold display change" (step 003AKS401; Yes), the specific effect is being executed by determining whether or not the specific effect execution flag indicating that the specific effect is being executed is on. It is determined whether or not there is (step 003AKS402). If it is determined that the specific effect is being executed (step 003AKS402; Yes), the specific effect determination process is terminated. With such a configuration, when the specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to the other hold display is restricted from being executed.

When it is determined that the specific effect is not being executed (step 003AKS402; No), the presence or absence of the specific effect as to whether or not to execute the specific effect and the effect mode of the specific effect when the specific effect is executed are determined (step). 003AKS403). At this time, "no specific effect" in which the specific effect is not executed, "first effect mode" in which the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode, "second effect mode" in which the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode, Alternatively, it is determined to be one of the "third staging modes" in which the specific staging is executed in the third staging mode. The effect control CPU 120 extracts a random value for determining a specific effect, and determines the presence or absence of the specific effect and the mode of the effect by referring to the specific effect determination table according to the winning determination result based on the random value. do it. The effect control CPU 120 specifies the winning determination result by referring to the winning determination result stored in association with each of the hold numbers "1" to "4" in the hold display data storage unit. do it.

Based on the determination result of step 003AKS403, it is determined whether or not it is determined to have "specific effect" (step 003AKS404). Specifically, if it is determined in step 003AKS403 that any of the "first effect mode", "second effect mode", or "third effect mode" is determined, it is determined that "there is a specific effect". good. If it is determined that there is no specific effect (step 003AKS404; No), the specific effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that "there is a specific effect" (step 003AKS404; Yes), the presence or absence of the rank-up effect as to whether or not to execute the rank-up effect and the rank-up effect pattern when the rank-up effect is executed are determined. After the determination (step 003AKS405), the specific effect determination process is terminated. The rank-up effect pattern is an effect pattern in which an effect mode of the rank-up effect can be specified, and a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance by being stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121. The effect control CPU 120 extracts a random value for determining the rank-up effect, and based on the random value, refers to the rank-up effect determination table according to the effect mode of the specific effect determined in step 003AKS403. Then, the presence or absence of the rank-up effect and the rank-up effect pattern may be determined. If it is determined that "there is a specific effect" (step 003AKS404; Yes), the above-mentioned specific effect execution flag is set to ON.

FIG. 8-11 (B) shows a configuration example of the specific effect determination table 003AKT7. In step 003AKS403 of the specific effect determination process, it is sufficient that the presence / absence of the specific effect and the effect mode of the specific effect can be determined by referring to the specific effect determination table 003AKT7 based on the winning determination result. In the specific effect determination table 003AKT7, the determination values, which are numerical values to be compared with the random value for determining the specific effect, are "no specific effect", "first effect mode", and "second effect" according to the determination result at the time of winning. It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of "aspect" and "third staging mode". The specific effect determination table 003AKT7 is configured with table data so that the effect mode to which the determination value is assigned differs depending on the determination result at the time of winning. As a result, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation differ depending on whether the effect mode of the specific effect is the first effect mode, the second effect mode, or the third effect mode. More specifically, when the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are lower than when the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode. Further, when the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are lower than when the specific effect is executed in the third effect mode. The assignment of the determination value shown in FIG. 8-11 (B) is only an example, and the determination value is the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation of the specific effect of the third effect mode as compared with the specific effect of the second effect mode. Is high, and the specific effect of the second effect mode can be assigned by any method so that the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation level are higher than those of the specific effect of the first effect mode. For example, the determination value is determined to be one of "no specific effect", "first effect mode", "second effect mode", and "third effect mode" at different ratios depending on the conditions such as the gaming state. May be assigned.

FIG. 8-12 (A) shows a setting example of the rank-up effect pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a plurality of rank-up effect patterns, a rank-up effect pattern 003AKF13 and a rank-up effect pattern 003AKF23 are prepared in advance. The plurality of rank-up effect patterns correspond to a combination of the effect mode of the specific effect before the execution of the rank-up effect and the effect mode of the specific effect after the execution of the rank-up effect. For example, the rank-up effect pattern 003AKF13 is used when the effect mode of the specific effect changes from the first effect mode to the third effect mode. Further, the rank-up effect pattern 003AKF23 is used when the effect mode of the specific effect changes from the second effect mode to the third effect mode. In the present embodiment, a rank-up effect pattern in which the effect mode of the specific effect changes from the first effect mode to the second effect mode is not set. With such a configuration, in the rank-up effect, the effect mode of the specific effect is restricted so as not to change from the first effect mode to the second effect mode. It should be noted that the rank-up effect is set at any of a plurality of types of timings during variable display, including the timing at which the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed and the timing at which the pseudo-continuous variation as the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. It is feasible, and different rank-up effect patterns may be prepared according to the execution timing of the rank-up effect. With such a configuration, by determining the rank-up effect pattern, the execution timing of the rank-up effect may be determined to be one of a plurality of types of timings in the variable display.

FIG. 8-12 (B) shows a configuration example of the rank-up effect determination table 003AKT8. In step 003AKS405 of the specific effect determination process, it is possible to determine the presence / absence of the rank-up effect and the rank-up effect pattern by referring to the rank-up effect determination table 003AKT8 based on the effect mode of the specific effect determined in step 003AKS403. It should be. In the rank-up effect determination table 003AKT8, the determination value, which is a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the rank-up effect, according to the effect mode of the specific effect determined in step 003AKS403, does not execute the rank-up effect. It may be assigned to the determination results of "no up effect", "003AKF13" for executing the rank-up effect with the rank-up effect pattern 003AKF13, and "003AKF23" for executing the rank-up effect with the rank-up effect pattern 003AKF23. In the rank-up effect determination table 003AKT8, whether or not the rank-up effect is executed by assigning different numbers of judgment values to "no rank-up effect" depending on whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit. The jackpot reliability and jackpot expectation may be set to be different depending on the case. Specifically, when the rank-up effect is executed, it may be set to control the jackpot game state as an advantageous state at a higher rate than when the rank-up effect is not executed. According to such a configuration, even if the specific effect is executed in the effect mode in which the jackpot reliability or the jackpot expectation is low before the rank-up effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is achieved by executing the rank-up effect. Since the degree or the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player and improve the game interest.

FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display with respect to the feature unit 003AK. In the variable display effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step 003AKS501). At this time, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display time is changed. It may be determined that the passage has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 003AKS501; No), it is determined whether or not the hold display change period is in effect (step 003AKS502). The hold display change period may be predetermined, for example, in an effect control pattern (such as a hold display change effect control pattern) determined in step 003AKS204 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that the hold display change period (step 003AKS502; Yes), control is performed to execute the hold display change in the hold display notice (step 003AKS503).

When it is not the hold display change period (step 003AKS502; No), or after the control by step 003AKS503 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the specific effect period (step 003AKS504). The specific effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (specific effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 003AKS204 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that the specific effect period is determined (step 003AKS504; Yes), the control to execute the specific effect is performed (step 003AKS505). By controlling by step 003AKS505, it is sufficient that the specific effect can be executed in any of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode. The above-mentioned specific effect execution flag is cleared when the specific effect is executed under the control of step 003AKS505 and ends.

When it is not the specific effect period (step 003AKS504; No), or after the control by step 003AKS505 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step 003AKS506). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in an effect control pattern (such as a special figure variation effect control pattern) determined according to the variation pattern in step 003AKS204 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 003AKS506; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step 003AKS507). When it is not the reach effect period (step 003AKS506; No), or after the control by step 003AKS507 is performed, for example, the decorative pattern is variable based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the variation pattern. After controlling to execute the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step 003AKS508), the variable display effect process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 003AKS501 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 003AKS501; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 003AKS509). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 003AKS509; No), the variable display-in-progress processing is terminated and the process is waited for. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When a symbol confirmation command is received (step 003AKS509; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and the final display result is obtained in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) as a stop display (step 003AKS510). At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step 003AKS511). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is a value corresponding to the waiting process for hitting a special figure (step 003AKS512), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

Next, an example of the effect operation of the specific effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-14. FIG. 8-14 shows an example of an effect operation when the rank-up effect is executed according to the rank-up effect pattern 003AKF13 in the specific effect.

In FIG. 8-14 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5, and the active display is performed. In the area 003AKA1, the active display is displayed in a round plain white display (display image 003AKD0), which is a normal display mode. In the state shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 are turned off. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the first hold display area 003AKB1, the hold display is displayed in the normal display mode in each display portion corresponding to the hold numbers "1" to "4". It is displayed in a round plain white display (display image 003AKD0). In the second hold display area 003AKB2, the hold display is not performed.

In this state, when the hold display change period arrives, the hold display change is executed. Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), the hold display displayed at the display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" of the first hold display area 003AKB1 is changed to the normal display mode due to the change of the hold display. The case where the image is changed to a round solid red display (display image 003AKD3) will be described as an example. In the example shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in response to this change in the hold display, the specific effect related to the hold display displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first hold display area 003AKB1. Is started in the first staging mode, and only the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 of the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emits light.

Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), in a state in which the specific effect related to the hold display displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" of the first hold display area 003AKB1 is being executed. , The hold display change is executed, and the hold display displayed at the display part corresponding to the hold number "4" of the first hold display area 003AKB1 is displayed in a round solid blue color (display image) from the normal display mode. The case of changing to 003KAD1) will be described as an example. In the state shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), the hold display notice, which is an effect related to the hold display displayed on the display part corresponding to the hold number "1", and the display part corresponding to the hold number "2". The hold display notice, which is an effect related to the hold display displayed in, is executed in the same period. As shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), since the specific effect related to the hold display displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" of the first hold display area 003AKB1 is executed, the first The specific effect related to the hold display displayed in the display portion corresponding to the hold number "4" in the hold display area 003AKB1 is not executed.

After that, the variable display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" of the first hold display area 003AKB1 in FIGS. 8-14 (A) to 8-14 (C) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), the active display having the same display mode as the hold display (round red solid color display) is displayed in the active display area 003AKA1, and the hold display is deleted. Then, the first hold display other than the hold display moves to the right.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (E), the rank-up effect is executed according to the rank-up effect pattern 003AKF13, and the effect mode of the specific effect changes from the first aspect to the third aspect. As a result, both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emit light. That is, the specific effect related to the hold display displayed at the display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" of the first hold display area 003AKB1 started by the first effect mode in FIG. 8-14 (B) is As shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), it continues even after the variable display corresponding to the hold display is started, and as shown in FIG. 8-14 (E), the effect mode is changed during the variable display. 3 Change to the staging mode.

As described above, the feature unit 003AK can display the hold display as a specific display for notifying the opportunity to give a game value advantageous to the player, and can display a specific effect in relation to the hold display which is the specific display. It is configured to be executable. The specific effect is executed using at least one of the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 as the first effect means and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 as the second effect means. Specifically, the specific effects include a first effect mode in which only the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 of the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emits light (used), and the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit. In any of the second staging mode in which only the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 is emitted from the 003AKC2 and the third staging mode in which both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 are used. Will be executed. The jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation differ depending on which of the first, second, and third staging modes the specific staging is performed (big hit as an advantageous state at different ratios). It is controlled by the game state). When the specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to the other hold display is restricted from being executed (the specific effect is executed in the specific effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-11). If it is determined to be inside (step 003AKS402; Yes), the specific effect determination process is terminated). As a result, as a specific effect related to one specific display, either a specific effect of the first effect mode using only the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 or a specific effect of the second effect mode using only the second light emitting unit 003AKC2. When one is being executed, as a specific effect related to the other specific display, the other of the specific effect of the first effect mode and the specific effect of the second effect mode is restricted so as not to be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding which holding display (specific display) the specific effect is related to and deteriorating the interest in the game.

Further, the feature unit 003AK is configured so that a plurality of hold display notices, which are effects related to the hold display as the specific display, can be executed in the same period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to show that there are a plurality of opportunities for the player to be given a game value advantageous to the player by the hold display, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 003AK, when the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are lower than when the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode (advantageous state at a low rate). It is controlled to the jackpot game state as). Further, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 as the first effect means is provided so as to be more easily recognized by the player than the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 as the second effect means. According to such a configuration, the specific effect of the first effect mode, which has a lower jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation than the specific effect of the second effect mode, is used for the specific effect of the second effect mode. Since the execution is performed using the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 which is easier for the player to recognize than the 003AKC2, the game interest is improved and the player's attention can be suitably attracted.

Further, in the feature unit 003AK, the specific effect related to the one hold display can be started before the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started, and can be continued even after the variable display is started. In addition, it is possible to execute a rank-up effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect from one effect mode to another effect mode having a higher jackpot reliability or a higher expectation of a jackpot than the one effect mode. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 003AK, in the rank-up effect, the effect mode of the specific effect is restricted so as not to change from the first effect mode to the second effect mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize which holding display the specific effect is related to, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to be able to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

For example, in the above embodiment, when the specific effect related to one hold display (specific display) is being executed, the specific effect related to the other hold display is restricted so as not to be executed. However, this is only an example, and when performing a specific effect related to one hold display, the specific effect related to the other hold display is specified at least until the variable display corresponding to the one hold display ends. You may limit it so that the effect is not executed. Specifically, when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed and the display mode of the other hold display changes due to a change in the hold display, the specific effect related to the other hold display is said to be the same. It may not be executed until the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is completed, and may be restricted to be executed at a predetermined timing after the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is finished. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding which hold display the specific effect is related to and deteriorating the game interest, and at the same time, the specific effect related to one hold display and the other. It is possible to perform both with a specific effect related to the hold display, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

When the specific effect related to one hold display is executed in one effect mode, the effect mode related to the other hold display has a lower jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation than the one effect mode. While limiting the execution of the specific effect of the above, the specific effect of the effect mode having a higher jackpot reliability or expectation than the one effect aspect related to the other hold display is executed. May be good. Specifically, when the specific effect related to one hold display is executed in one effect mode, the specific effect related to the other hold display is given a higher hit reliability or a jackpot than the one effect mode. If it is decided to execute in another effect mode with high expectation, the specific effect related to the one hold display is stopped, and the specific effect related to the other hold display is performed in the other effect mode. It should be executed at. According to such a configuration, even during the execution of the specific effect related to one hold display, the specific effect related to the other hold display and having a higher jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation than the running specific effect can be obtained. It can be made feasible and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

In the above embodiment, if the hold display change is not executed, the specific effect is not executed. However, this is only an example, and even when the hold display change is not executed, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a specific effect even when the hold display change is not executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the above embodiment, the specific effect related to the one hold display is described as being executed at the timing when the display mode of the one hold display changes due to the change in the hold display. However, this is only an example, and the specific effect can be executed at any timing. For example, the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the game ball enters the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Alternatively, the specific effect is set as the active display by moving (shifting) one of the hold displays displayed when a new first special figure game or second special figure game is started to the active display area 003AKA1. It may be executed at the timing when it is displayed and the other hold display is shifted.

In the above-described embodiment, the hold display is described as a specific display for notifying the opportunity to give a game value advantageous to the player. However, this is only an example, and any display that informs the opportunity of giving a game value advantageous to the player can be displayed as a specific display. For example, the active display may be displayed as a specific display. Alternatively, it is executed over a plurality of variable displays (variable display of the number of chances), and a continuous effect suggesting the possibility that a game value advantageous to the player (for example, control to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state) is given. May be configured to be executable, and an icon indicating the number of variable displays (number of chances) executed during the continuous production may be displayed as a specific display. Alternatively, an icon indicating the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot game state may be displayed as a specific display.

Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, and a part thereof may be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines. Inside the housing of the slot machine, a variable display device is provided in which a plurality of (for example, three) reels in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Further, the front door of the slot machine is provided with an image display device having the same display function as the image display device 5 in the above embodiment. On the outer periphery of each reel, there are multiple types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other, such as "Red 7", "White 7", "BAR", "JAC", "Watermelon", "Cherry", and "Bell". They are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portion of each reel are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages by the variable display device. Each reel rotates in response to a predetermined operation (for example, pressing operation) with respect to the start lever, so that the design of each reel is continuously changed and displayed. Then, when stopping the rotation of each reel, the player operates a plurality of stop switches installed corresponding to each reel. If the stop switch is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reel rotation is started, the reel rotation may be automatically stopped.

At a predetermined position on the front door of the slot machine, for example, a slot into which a game medium such as a medal can be inserted, or a BET switch for setting (BET) one unit (for example, one medal) of the game medium as a bet number. MAXBET switch for setting the maximum number of units that can be bet in one game (for example, three medals), stored as credit (number of game media stored as game value owned by the player) A settlement switch for settlement of the game medium used for setting the game medium and the game medium used for setting the bet number is provided.

When playing a game on a slot machine, first, the game medium is inserted from the slot, or the number of bets is set using credits. When using credit, operate the BET switch or MAXBET switch. When the number of bets is set in this way, one of the plurality of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets becomes valid, the operation of the start lever is valid, that is, the game can be executed, and the variable display is performed. The execution condition is satisfied. If a replay or other replaying combination is won in the previous game, the next game can be continuously executed, and the variable display execution condition is satisfied. When the start lever is operated while the game can be executed in this way, each reel rotates in response to the establishment of the variable display start condition, and the symbol continuously fluctuates. During the fluctuation of the design due to the rotation of each reel, various effect operations are executed by the display operation of the effect image on the image display device, the sound output operation from the speaker, the lighting operation of the game effect lamp, and the like. For example, in the image display device, the same symbol as the symbol drawn on the outer peripheral portion of each reel, or a symbol different from the symbol of each reel but associated with the symbol is variably displayed as the identification information for staging. Just do it. Further, even after the variation of the symbol is completed, various staging operations such as an effect operation for notifying the occurrence of a prize and an effect operation for demonstrating may be executed. When any of the plurality of stop switches is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped, and the display result is visually derived and displayed.

Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped, one game ends, and the combination of symbols called predetermined combinations on any of the activated winning lines stops as the display result of each reel. Will be awarded. The types of winning roles are roughly divided into small roles that accompany the granting of medals, re-gaming roles that enable the start of the next game without the need to set the number of bets, and special roles that accompany the transition of the gaming state. There is a role, and the winning role is determined according to the playing state. In the slot machine, when the start lever is operated, the winning of each winning combination determined according to the game state is generated based on the random number value extracted from the random number circuit similar to the random number circuit 509 in the above embodiment at the timing when the start lever is operated. An internal lottery will be held to determine whether or not to allow. Winning this internal lottery and allowing the generation of prizes is also referred to as "internal winning". Of the winnings of each role, the winning of the small role and the replaying role is valid only in the game in which the winning is decided, but the winning of the special role has all the roles allowed to occur by the internal lottery. Is valid until. That is, once the generation of a special role prize is allowed, even if the special role prize cannot be generated in each game, the winning will be carried over to the next game.

The gaming state in the slot machine includes a specific gaming state and a normal gaming state. In addition to the regular bonus and the big bonus, the specific gaming state may include AT (assist time), CT (challenge time), RT (replay time), ART (assist replay time) and the like. In the game state of the regular bonus, for example, small roles such as JAC, cherry, watermelon, and bell are defined as winning roles, and are subject to lottery in the internal lottery. In the game state of the big bonus, in the predetermined small role game, for example, small roles such as cherry, watermelon and bell, and special roles such as regular bonus (or JACIN) are defined as winning roles. It is subject to lottery in the internal lottery in each small role game. In the game state of the AT, the winning conditions of a specific winning combination that cannot be made to appear unless the operation matching the winning conditions such as the stop order and the stop timing of each reel is performed are notified. In the CT gaming state, each reel is uncontrolled within a certain range, so that it is possible to win a specific small winning combination. In the game state of RT, a replay role such as a replay wins a prize with a high probability. In the ART gaming state, the AT gaming state and the RT gaming state are combined. In the normal game state, for example, small roles such as cherries, watermelons, and bells, replay roles such as replays, and special roles such as big bonuses and regular bonuses are predetermined as winning roles, and are defined in each game. It is subject to lottery in the internal lottery.

In this case, an icon indicating the number of times that the start lever can be effectively operated may be displayed as a specific display.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 which is the first effect means is provided so as to be more easily recognized by the player than the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 which is the second effect means. However, this is only an example, and the first staging means and the second staging means may be as easily recognized by the player as each other.

In the above embodiment, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 which is the first effect means is provided on the game board 2 so that the player can easily recognize the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 as compared with the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 which is the second effect means. I explained it as if it were. However, this is only an example, and the first staging means can be provided by any method so as to be more easily recognized by the player than the second staging means.

For example, by providing the first staging means closer to the configuration that the player pays attention to during the game as compared with the second staging means, the first staging means may be provided so as to be more easily recognized by the player than the second staging means. According to such a configuration, the line of sight of the player is more likely to be guided to the first staging means than the second staging means, and the first staging means is more easily recognized by the player than the second staging means. Specific examples of the configuration that the player pays attention to during the game include a first start port, a second start port, speakers 8L, 8R, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, an operating means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.). ), The vibration means provided in), the air outlet for blowing out the wind, and the like.

Alternatively, the first effect means is provided at a position where the player can see the first effect means without being shielded by a predetermined member in both the first state and the second state, while the second effect means is provided in the first state. In the second state, the first staging means is provided at a position where the player is not shielded by the predetermined member and can be seen by the player in the second state. It may be provided so that it can be easily recognized by the player as compared with the directing means. According to such a configuration, the first staging means recognized by the player in both the first state and the second state is not recognized by the player in the first state, and is recognized by the player only in the second state. It is easier for the player to recognize it than the second effect means that is recognized. Therefore, the first staging means is more easily recognized by the player than the second staging means. For example, the first lamp is provided as the first effect means, the second lamp is provided as the second effect means, and the movable member effect using the movable member is not executed for the first lamp as the first effect means. In both the state (first state) and the state in which the movable member effect is executed (second state), the movable member is not shielded by the movable member (predetermined member) and is provided at a position visible to the player. Then, the second lamp as the second effect means is shielded by the movable member when the movable member effect is not executed and cannot be visually recognized by the player, and the movable member effect is executed. It may be provided at a position where the player can see it without being shielded by the movable member. Alternatively, a first movable member is provided as the first staging means, a second movable member is provided as the second staging means, and the first movable member as the first staging means is second movable using the second movable member. The player is not shielded by the game board 2 (predetermined member) in both the state in which the member effect is not executed (first state) and the state in which the second movable member effect is executed (second state). On the other hand, the second movable member as the second effect means is shielded by the game board 2 in a state where the second movable member effect is not executed, and the player cannot see the second movable member. In the state where the movable member effect is executed, the movable member may be provided at a position where the player can see the movable member without being shielded by the game board 2.

In the above embodiment, it is assumed that the first staging means is the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second staging means is the second light emitting unit 003AKC2. However, this is only an example, and the first effect means and the second effect means include image display, sound output, lighting of a lamp (for example, a 7-segment LED), operation of an accessory, or a combination thereof. Any method may be used as long as it can suggest the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state. For example, the first effect means and the second effect means may execute a specific effect by displaying an image on the image display device 5.

In addition, when the specific effect is executed by the combination of image display, sound output, lamp lighting, operation of the accessory, etc., if the specific effect related to one hold display is executed, the other It may be restricted to execute only a part of the specific effect related to the hold display of. For example, when a specific effect is executed by a combination of image display, sound output, and lamp lighting, when a specific effect related to one hold display is executed, it is related to another hold display. Of the specific effects, the display of the image and the output of the sound may be performed, but the lighting of the lamp may be restricted so as not to be performed.

In the above embodiment, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 which is the first staging means is provided on the gaming board 2, and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 which is the second staging means is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. However, this is only an example, and both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 may be provided on the game board 2. Further, one of the first staging means and the second staging means may be a movable member (role).

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the rank-up effect is executed during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the one hold display, and the effect mode of the specific effect related to the one hold display changes. However, this is only an example, and the rank-up effect is executed before the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started, and the effect mode of the specific effect related to the one hold display is changed. May be good.

In the above embodiment, when the specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to one hold display is restricted while the specific effect related to the other hold display is not executed. It was explained that the hold display notice related to other hold display is not limited even when is executed. However, this is only an example, and when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the hold display notice related to another hold display may be restricted from being executed.

In the above-described embodiment, in the rank-up effect, the effect mode of the specific effect is restricted so as not to change from the first effect mode to the second effect mode. However, this is only an example, and in the rank-up effect, the effect mode of the specific effect may be changed from the first effect mode to the second effect mode. When the effect mode can be changed from the first effect mode to the second effect mode in the rank-up effect, it is preferable to configure the system so that the correspondence between the hold display and the specific effect becomes clear. As a specific example of the configuration in which the correspondence between the hold display and the specific effect is clarified, when the effect of displaying an image on the image display device 5 is executed as the specific effect, the specific effect corresponds to the execution of the specific effect. An effect image showing how the image related to the effect and the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 related to the specific effect interact with each other is displayed on the image display device 5. Alternatively, when performing an effect of emitting at least one of a plurality of lamps as a specific effect, each lamp is arranged so that the correspondence with each hold display displayed on the image display device 5 becomes clear. (For example, placed directly above each corresponding hold display). According to these configurations, the relationship between the hold display and the specific effect is clear. Therefore, even if the effect mode of the specific effect is changed from the first effect mode to the second effect mode in the rank-up effect, the specific effect is anytime. There is no risk that the player will misunderstand whether it is related to the hold display of the game and the game interest will be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the hold display change determination process shown in FIG. 8-9 and the specific effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-11 are described as being executed in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of the effect control process process. bottom. However, this is only an example, and the hold display change determination process and the specific effect determination process may be executed in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161 of the effect control process process. Specifically, in the pre-reading notice setting process, by executing the hold display change determination process based on the start winning prize transmitted from the main board 11, the presence / absence of the hold display change, the effect pattern of the hold display change, and the like are determined. By determining the effect mode of the hold display change and executing the specific effect determination process based on the determination result, it is sufficient to determine the presence / absence of the specific effect and the effect mode of the specific effect such as the effect pattern of the specific effect. .. For example, in the pre-reading notice setting process, the execution timing and the effect pattern of the hold display change may be determined, and the execution timing and the effect pattern of the specific effect may be determined according to the determination result. According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect at the execution timing and the effect pattern according to the execution timing of the hold display change and the effect pattern, the effect of the effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the specific effect has been described as an effect suggesting a ratio controlled by the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state. However, this is only an example, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, one of the set values 1 to 3), and the set value can be set to the set value. Originally, the game may be configured so that the game can be progressed so that the advantage for the player is different, and the set value may be suggested by the above-mentioned specific effect. As the configuration related to the setting of the set value and the suggestion of the set value, each configuration related to the feature unit 112IW, 248F to 250F, 109AK, and 110AK described later may be adopted.

Any part or all of each of the above configurations can be combined with each other in any way.

Each configuration related to the feature unit 003AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature unit. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature portions.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 003AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 003AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display) (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S161) and
A specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect in relation to the specific display displayed by the specific display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003AKS203) and the like.
Equipped with
The specific staging means includes a first staging means (for example, a first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the like) and a second staging means (for example, a second light emitting unit 003AKC2 and the like).
A first specific effect (for example, in the first effect mode) in which only the first effect means of the first effect means and the second effect means is used as the specific effect according to the ratio controlled to the advantageous state. (Specific effect, etc.), a second specific effect using only the second effect means of the first effect means and the second effect means (for example, a specific effect of the second effect mode), and the first effect means. It is possible to execute either a third specific effect (for example, a specific effect of the third effect mode) using both the second effect means and the second effect means.
When either one of the first specific effect and the second specific effect is being executed as the specific effect related to the specific display, as the specific effect related to the other specific display, as the specific effect. When it is determined that the specific effect is being executed in the specific effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-11, the execution of the other of the first specific effect and the second specific effect is restricted (for example, (for example). Step 003AKS402; Yes), end the specific effect determination process),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying which specific display the specific effect is related to and deteriorating the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, which relates to the feature unit 003AK.
It is possible to execute a plurality of effects related to the specific display (for example, a notice of hold display) displayed by the specific display means in the same period.
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to show that there are a plurality of opportunities to be given a game value advantageous to the player by the specific display, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 003AK.
When the specific effect related to the specific display is being executed, the specific effect related to the other specific display is not executed until at least the variable display corresponding to the specific display is completed. (For example, when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, a specific effect related to another hold display is executed at a predetermined timing after the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is completed. To limit),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying which specific display the specific effect is related to and deteriorating the game interest.

(4) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (3) related to the feature unit 003AK,
When the first specific effect is executed as the specific effect, the advantageous state is controlled at a lower rate than when the second specific effect is executed as the specific effect (for example, the specific effect is controlled in the first effect mode). When executed, the jackpot reliability and jackpot expectation are lower than when the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode).
The first effect means is provided so as to be easily recognized by the player as compared with the second effect means (for example, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 is provided so as to be easily recognized by the player as compared with the second light emitting unit 003AKC2).
You may do so.
With such a configuration, the player's attention can be suitably attracted.

(5) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (4) pertaining to the feature unit 003AK,
The specific effect related to the specific display of one can be started before the variable display corresponding to the specific display of the one is started, and can be continued even after the variable display is started (for example). The specific effect related to the one hold display can be started before the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started, and can be continued even after the variable display is started).
The effect mode of the specific effect can be changed from one effect mode to another effect mode indicating that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the one effect mode (for example, a rank-up effect can be executed). ),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.

(Explanation of feature 112IW)
Next, the feature unit 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 112IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 112IW003 with the left side as the center and the door closing position where the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into the lock and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 112IW003 and the glass door frame can be opened by players other than the clerk. The 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. Although the feature unit 112IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, the board case 112IW201 is provided with a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the feature unit 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, a substrate including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Further, the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or is close to) the right portion of the board case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Thereby, the right side portion of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating the pieces, the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the machines and the pachinko gaming machine 1. And the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may cause fraudulent acts such as changing the setting value. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A switches the setting with the setting key 112IW051. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the sealing seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature unit 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), and FIG. In addition to the display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C) and the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the loss shown in FIG. 9-6. A variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to increase the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is in the order of 2 or 3, the higher the advantage is.

(Display result judgment table)
9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value as a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change) than the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/280 for non-probability change, 1/28 for probability change). do.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is used. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, for example, the same probability change is applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (probability change end number) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

In the feature unit 112IW, a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 9-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning in the second start winning slot (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-7, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. To simplify, the percentage of assigned determination values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2". When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5 (B). In the feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the staging control board 12, the start of the jackpot gaming state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect as the effect action to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the staging control board 12 side is completed, the next This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling can be achieved. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

The feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is used for a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly performed.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot type A <B <C is used. This makes it possible to increase the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 112IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 112IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the game is in a big hit game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the ratio of big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and the probability change control, the number of controls, etc.) between the big hit type A to the big hit type C, and the fanfare period and the interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Includes determining by percentage.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured to have different periods. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 112IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the present feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases, the jackpot type C as the jackpot type becomes easier to be determined, etc.). Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the type of big hit. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 as the sex (so-called V probability variation type), the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the gaming ball is specially variable during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability is higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3, while the jackpot game is in progress. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, in this way, when the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is passed through the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to a probabilistic state or a jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result should be "big hit" and the fluctuation display result may be "missing". A loss fluctuation pattern determination table to be used when the determination is made in advance is prepared in advance.

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and the other period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use different loss fluctuation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 9-6 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using a real-time clock or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6, normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, so that the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) has a higher rate of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and is a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution in the special period than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss at times other than non-reach loss, depending on the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of set values "1" <"2" <" 3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". It is configured so that the ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 112IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. It is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

The feature unit 112IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 regardless of which of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B) is used. Then, the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image and displays the effect symbol in a variable manner. It should be noted that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment during the special period or the period from the time when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW. (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine.

As shown in FIG. 9-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 112IW is configured to have different average fluctuation times by differentiating the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times depending on the set value. For example, non-reach loss A to C. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. When multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the shaking display of the effect symbol or the time of the high-speed fluctuation display may be different for the effect, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in the appearance.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final staging symbol (final) The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the period during which the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the setting in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is high may make the fluctuation time longer.

The feature unit 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time as compared with other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. The variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the variation time may be different depending on the set value for the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this feature unit 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (large winning opening, second major winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform aggregation and calculate various winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases based on the aggregation.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a 4-digit display unit. The display unit of each digit is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments.

The display contents are displayed on the first-digit display unit and the second-digit display unit, and the numerical values are displayed as percentages on the third-digit display unit and the fourth-digit display unit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the reciprocal ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. When is displayed, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) in the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. Is displayed with "A7." On the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the total of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative combination ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) in the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the one digit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the display unit of the eyes and the display unit of the second digit. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

Further, the display of these short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, and the set values set at that time are It is possible to sequentially change the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2.

In the feature unit 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display is not limited to this. In the monitor 112IW029, only the numerical value of 1 or only the numerical value of any 2 of these ratios, combinations, and bases may be displayed.

In addition, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated and the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the winning ratio, and the base. good.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 9-8 and 9-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the staging control means to start for measuring the time until the staging control means (specifically, the staging control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Set the timer (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation wait timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the activation of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start wait timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 112IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 starts, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are sent before the staging control CPU 120 starts, and the command may be missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 clears, for example, a factory-factory setting flag indicating that the RAM 102 has the factory-factory setting (for example, this flag is cleared even if the RAM clear processes 1 and 2 and the recovery process described later are executed. (Cleared when the setting change process described later is executed) is set so that it is not set, and in step 112IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory setting flag is set. do it. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, a value indicating that the factory setting value is left as it is (for example, "0" or "-") is set as a set value, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. May be checked to see if it remains at the factory value. If the factory setting remains the same (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If it is not the factory setting (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the set value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 112IWS008). In step 112 IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if a power failure occurs during the change of the setting value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared. Information is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is off (N in step 112IWS011), when the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 112IWS012). In N) of step 112IWS013, it does not shift to step 112IWS014 but shifts to loop processing.

When the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S014 is executed, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 112IW (N in steps 112IWS007, S008), or the factory setting remains as it is (step 112IWS007, S008). In the case of 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 open. The RAM is cleared on condition that the setting value can be changed after step 112IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation process start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative illuminant such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is completed to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. (Step 112IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the ratio and the connection ratio are cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained. In the game control main process shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9, when it is determined that the output signal from the clear switch is on, the RAM clear process (RAM clear 2 process) is immediately executed. However, when it is determined that the output signal from the clear switch is on, a flag indicating that the clear switch is on is set, and the processing required at startup (door open sensor 112IW090 or setting key) is set. After executing 112IW051 confirmation, setting confirmation processing, setting change processing, etc.), it may be determined whether or not the flag is set, and if it is set, RAM clear processing may be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change processing start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative illuminant such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). Further, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing is completed is transmitted to the staging control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S9. (Step 112IWS033), the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 9-10 (A) is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processes of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation error processing (step 112IWSA04). Then, after that, it shifts to the loop processing. In step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that the setting confirmation error is performed, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board on which the gaming machine is mounted. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 9-10 (B) is a flowchart showing a setting change process (step 112IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 is updated and displayed as "2", and "2" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029. Updates the display of the display monitor 112IW029 to "3" and displays the display monitor 112IW0.
When "3" is displayed as the set value in 29, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated and displayed to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated and stored with respect to the already stored set value) (step 112IWSB04).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting change error processing (step 112IWSB07). Then, after that, it shifts to the loop processing. In step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating a setting change error and execute the setting change error notification based on the reception of the command on the staging control CPU 120 side. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board on which the gaming machine is mounted. Further, in this example, when the setting change error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed. In this case, since the setting changing flag is still set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y and 112IWS014 in step 112IWS009). The error state will be cleared.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

The specified set value may be displayed on the image display device 5 in step 112IWSA01 of the setting confirmation process. Further, in 112IWSB01 of the setting change process, the specified setting value may be displayed on the image display device 5. Then, the subsequent processing may be executed by using the image display device 5.

Further, during the execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-10, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are not displayed during the normal game (for example, all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned on or blinked). Aspect) may be used. By notifying the player using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation state or the setting change state is suitable. The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may be different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

If the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change process shown in FIG. 9-10, the setting change process is executed again and the updated setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM). Unless the setting change is completed by, an error may occur. Specifically, the setting change flag (which is not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM that stores the setting value at the start of the setting change processing, and the setting change is performed at the end of the setting change processing. If the flag is turned off and a process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process) is executed and the setting change flag is on, an error occurs. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not proceed normally in the middle, the clerk at the amusement park may mistakenly think that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, it is possible to guarantee the reliable completion of the setting change by making an error if the setting change is not completed.

Further, in step 112IWSA01 and step 112IWSB01 of FIG. 9-10, the current set value is read from the backup RAM and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, the image display device 5 is displayed with information indicating that an error occurs, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, if all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned off, and all the lights are turned on during the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, all the blinking may be performed).

FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (step 112IWS005 to S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS015 to S017) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Will be executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (A) and 9-12 (B), when the power is turned off (power cut off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. If the big winning opening is open during a big hit game or the like at the timing when the power is turned off, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (D), the CPU 103 each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like is detected. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (E), the CPU 103 sets the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like. Store (update storage) in the backup area of. At this time, the CPU 103 tells the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio of the set values set at that time. Display base 1 and base 2. Also, RAM
If the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of 102, the reserved storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 9-12 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (F), the CPU 103 displays "EE" on the display monitor 112IW029 based on the occurrence of an error in the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored. It is possible to make it.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 112IW) may be displayed.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 9-13 and 9-14 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, check the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed on the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step 112IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS102 to S104, in the feature unit 112IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 112IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step 112IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS108). As described above, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change processing is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the processing of step 112IWS011, but the step is also performed after the power is turned on. By executing the process of 112IWS108, the set value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started.

Even if the same fluctuation pattern is used, if different fluctuation pattern commands are sent for each set value, the fluctuation pattern commands for the total number of fluctuation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the set value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern command corresponding to the set value. good. In this case, for example, the set value command is sent only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of set values. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 112IWS011) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 112IWS108) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, the setting value command for turning on the power and the setting value command for starting the fluctuation may be configured as separate commands, and different setting value commands may be sent at the time of turning on the power and at the starting of the fluctuation. good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to send the staging control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 side is configured depending on which set value is used. It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. It may be selected by a ratio, or if the set value is 3, the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected or the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command is not received normally, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not received normally, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 controls to send a probabilistic state background specification command when it is in a probabilistic state, and controls to send a time saving state background specification command when it is in a time saving state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 9-4) with a random number value MR1 and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the process proceeds to step 112IWS116.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the big hit determination values (Y in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 112IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 9-5) to match the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 112IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS115). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, if the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a different special symbol stop symbol depending on the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

The feature portion 112IW includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 9-5 (A), (B)). reference)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) suggesting a set value may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means enables a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) to be executed regardless of a set value in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. It is described that such a configuration may enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the first invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the first invention,
It is a gaming machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
An information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The information display means can display the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-12, a portion where the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base can be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may differ depending on the set value set, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be predetermined according to the set value, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
An information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The information display means can display the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-12, a portion where the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base can be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 112IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the other feature units to form a gaming machine.

(Explanation of feature section 248F to feature section 250F)
Next, the feature section 248F to the feature section 250F will be described. The feature unit 248F has a feature regarding the continuation rate suggestion effect, the feature unit 249F has a feature regarding the setting suggestion effect pattern A, and the feature unit 250F has a feature regarding the setting suggestion effect pattern B.

(About specs)
FIG. 10-1 is a diagram for explaining specifications at each set value. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in setting 1, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change is 1/319, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change is 1/95, and the ST continuation rate is 65.29%. In setting 2, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change is 1/280, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change is 1/75, and the ST continuation rate is 73.87%. In setting 3, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change is 1/250, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change is 1/60, and the ST continuation rate is 81.37%. Here, the ST continuation rate indicates the probability that the ST state will continue. The ST state is a state in which the probabilistic state is controlled after the big hit game state and the probable change state continues until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed. In the feature section 248F to the feature section 250F, ST continues 100 times after the big hit game state. The continuation rate is the probability of being repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state, the probability of being repeatedly controlled to the same gaming state (for example, probability change), and the probability of being repeatedly controlled to the high base state (for example, probability change,). It is a concept that includes the probability of being controlled in the order of time reduction and probability change.

Due to the setting of the data shown in FIG. 10-1, in the case of setting 1, all of the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change, and the ST continuation rate are the lowest among the set values. On the other hand, in the case of setting 3, all of the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change, and the ST continuation rate are the highest among the set values. Therefore, the relationship of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 is advantageous to the player. The set value may be further provided with a plurality of stages, and may be provided, for example, in stages 1 to 6 so as to be advantageous to the player.

(About the flow of various productions from the feature section 248F to the feature section 250F)
FIG. 10-2 is a timing chart showing the flow of various effects. FIG. 10-2 (A) shows the flow of the continuation rate suggestion effect which is the effect of the feature unit 248F, and FIG. 10-2 (B) shows the flow of the setting suggestion effect (pattern A) which is the effect of the feature unit 249F. , FIG. 10-2 (C) shows the flow of the setting suggestion effect (pattern B) which is the effect of the feature unit 250F.

First, the continuation rate suggestion effect, which is the effect of the feature unit 248F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), will be described. The continuation rate suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a continuation rate of ST that is different for each set value. Since the continuation rate is different for each set value, suggesting the continuation rate also suggests the set value. As shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), the continuation rate suggestion effect is an effect executed in the ending period after the big hit game state. After the jackpot game state is completed, information such as entering the ST and the number of balls to be obtained is shown as a video to the player for a predetermined period. During the ending period, the continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed. After that, the ST state continues for 100 fluctuations as the ST period.

Next, the setting suggestion effect (pattern A), which is the effect of the feature unit 249F shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), will be described. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests which of the set values of the plurality of stages is set. In the setting suggestion effect of the pattern A, when the jackpot game state is controlled between the variable display of 1 to 20 rotations, which is the earliest number of the 100 ST periods after the jackpot game state and the ending period are over. The setting suggestion effect is executed during the round. Further, in the setting suggestion effect of the pattern A, the setting suggestion effect is not executed when a big hit occurs between the variable display of 21 to 100 rotations. That is, in the setting suggestion effect of the pattern A, when the player is controlled to the big hit game state at any number of times of the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST period advantageous to the player, any of the 21st to 100th rotations. It can be said that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher (ratio of 100: 0) than when the jackpot game state is controlled by the number of times.

Next, the setting suggestion effect (pattern B), which is the effect of the feature unit 250F shown in FIG. 10-2 (C), will be described. In the pattern B, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the same manner as in the pattern A. In the setting suggestion effect of pattern B, the period of variable display of 1 to 20 rotations, which is the earliest number of the 100 ST periods after the jackpot game state and the ending period ends, is the first setting suggestion effect period. There is. The setting suggestion effect is executed during the round when the jackpot game state is controlled by the variable display during the first setting suggestion effect period. Further, in the setting suggestion effect of the pattern B, the variable display period of 21 to 100 rotations in the ST period is the second setting suggestion effect period. The setting suggestion effect is executed during the round when the big hit game state is controlled by the variable display during the second setting suggestion effect period. Here, the first setting suggestion effect period and the second setting suggestion effect period differ in the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect executed when the jackpot game state is controlled. In addition, when the player is controlled to the jackpot game state in the first setting suggestion effect period of the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST period advantageous to the player, the jackpot game is performed in the second setting suggestion effect period of the 21st to 100th rotations. The execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the state is controlled.

Here, in a gaming machine having no set value, the continuation rate of the ST state is constant. Therefore, it is not interesting to execute the continuation rate suggestion effect on such a gaming machine. However, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), the continuation rate suggestion effect suggesting to the player the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the ST state is executed on the gaming machine having the set value, so that the setting is set. It is possible to draw attention to the suggested production, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the continuation rate suggestion effect is an effect that is executed during the ending period in which a relatively long time can be taken. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention at the end of the big hit game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the setting suggestion effect of the pattern A is executed during the round. By doing so, it is possible to focus on the round game and improve the interest of the game during the round game.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect of the pattern B is also executed during the round. By doing so, it is possible to focus on the round game and improve the interest of the game during the round game.

(About feature section 248F)
Next, the continuation rate suggestion effect, which is the effect of the feature unit 248F, will be described in detail. FIG. 10-3 is a diagram showing a continuation rate suggestion effect determination table. The continuation rate suggestion effect determination table is a table used in the continuation rate suggestion effect process or the hold continuous effect process, which will be described later. Using the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the effect is executed, and if so, which effect (character A, character B, character C, or character D) is to be executed. The continuation rate suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

As shown in the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table, in setting 1, the ratio determined without the effect is 88%, the ratio determined by the character A is 5%, the ratio determined by the character B is 4%, and the character C is determined. The ratio determined by is 3%, and the ratio determined by character D is not (0%). In setting 2, the ratio determined without effect is 88%, the ratio determined by character A is 3%, the ratio determined by character B is 5%, the ratio determined by character C is 4%, and the ratio determined by character D is 4%. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 3, the ratio determined without effect is 87%, the ratio determined by character A is 3%, the ratio determined by character B is 4%, the ratio determined by character C is 5%, and the ratio determined by character D is 5%. The percentage determined to be 1%.

Due to the setting of the data shown in FIG. 10-3, the ratio of selecting no effect in the continuation rate suggestion effect process is high, and the continuation rate suggestion effect is not easily executed. Further, the ratio when the effect is executed is "character A> character B> character C" in the case of setting 1, "character B> character C> character A" in the case of setting 2, and in the case of setting 3. Is "Character C> Character B> Character A> Character D". That is, since the appearance rate of the character differs depending on the set value, it is possible to suggest a different ST continuation rate for each set value from the aspect of the character. Further, since the character D appears only in the most advantageous setting 3, it is confirmed that the setting ratio of the character D is the lowest, but when it appears, the setting 3 is a high setting. It should be noted that any character may be displayed at a rate of 100% without being determined without the effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the characters A to C are feasible modes regardless of the set values. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately suggest a set value depending on the mode of these characters having different execution ratios, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect mode of the continuation rate suggestion effect includes the character D which is determined to be set to the high continuation rate setting 3. According to this, when the character D having a low execution rate appears, the high setting is fixed, so that the set value can be preferably suggested, and the interest of the game is improved.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuation rate suggestion effect processing. The continuation rate suggestion effect process is a process executed in the ending effect process (S177).

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit from the normal state (248FS001). Whether or not it is a so-called first hit, which is a big hit from the normal state, is determined based on a command for designating the game state. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit from the normal state (Y at 248FS001), the process ends. That is, it is controlled so that the continuation rate suggestion effect is not executed at the first hit. In addition, the continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed at the first hit. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not a big hit from the normal state (N in 248FS001), the effect content of the continuation rate suggestion effect is determined by the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table according to the set value. (248FS002) Transition to 248FS003.

In 248FS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the continuation rate suggestion effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the continuation rate suggestion effect is to be executed (Y in 248FS003), the effect control CPU 120 is set to execute the determined continuation rate suggestion effect (248FS004), and ends the process. As a result, the continuation rate suggestion effect is set to be executed during a predetermined period of the ending period. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect suggestion effect is not executed (N in 248FS003), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

It should be noted that the continuation rate suggestion effect is not always executed when the predetermined period is reached when the execution is decided, and may be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B that can be operated by the player, and the continuation rate suggestion effect is not executed unless the push button 31B is operated during the operable period. good. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to operate. Further, when the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed by using the operation means, the promotion image that promotes the operation to the operation means may be displayed, or the promotion image may not be displayed.

Further, although the continuation rate suggestion effect is often not executed, the continuation rate suggestion effect by the characters A to D may be executed at a rate of 100%. Even in such a case, it is desirable that the appearance rate of the character D for which the setting 3 is determined is lower than the appearance rate of the other characters. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value from being immediately revealed to the player.

FIG. 10-5 is a diagram showing an example of a hold continuous effect determination table and an effect determination table with a hold continuous effect. These tables are stored in ROM 121. In the feature unit 248F, a hold continuous effect may be executed. The hold ream effect is whether or not the hold storage information (hold information) related to the variable display includes the hold storage information (so-called hold ream information) that is a big hit (whether or not the hold ream is held). A pre-reading process is performed, and when the hold storage information that becomes a big hit is included, an effect that suggests that the hold storage information that becomes a big hit is included (holding continuous suggestion effect) is executed by the effect control CPU 120. Is. In the hold continuous effect, an effect using the same character as the above-mentioned continuation rate suggestion effect is executed. Then, the current set value is suggested by the mode of the character executed in the hold continuous effect.

The hold continuous effect determination table of FIG. 10-5 (A) is used to determine whether or not to execute the hold continuous effect when there is the hold storage information of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the ratio of executing the hold continuous effect is set to 70%, and the ratio of not executing the hold continuous effect is set to 30%. If there is hold storage information that is a big hit, the hold continuous effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

Which effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) is to be executed in the effect determination table with the hold continuous effect shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) when it is determined to execute the hold continuous effect. Is used to determine. As shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in setting 1, the ratio determined by the character A is 30%, the ratio determined by the character B is 20%, the ratio determined by the character C is 10%, and the character. The ratio determined to D is set to be 40%. Further, in setting 2, the ratio determined by the character A is 10%, the ratio determined by the character B is 30%, the ratio determined by the character C is 20%, and the ratio determined by the character D is 40%. It is set to be. Further, in setting 3, the ratio determined by the character A is 10%, the ratio determined by the character B is 20%, the ratio determined by the character C is 30%, and the ratio determined by the character D is 40%. It is set to be.

When the hold continuous effect is executed in the hold continuous effect process by setting the data shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is the character regardless of the set value. D is the highest, and the ratio is constant regardless of the set value. That is, the character D that appears only in the setting 3 of the continuation rate suggestion effect is not an effect that suggests a set value in the hold continuous effect. However, since the character D appears only with an extremely low probability when the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed, the effect appears at a high rate when the hold continuous effect is executed, so that the interest of the game should be improved. Can be done. Further, it can be said that the high setting is confirmed when the character D does not become a hold ream even though the character D appears.

Focusing on other than character D, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is "character A> character B> character C" in the case of setting 1, and "character B> character C> character A in the case of setting 2." , In the case of setting 3, "character C> character B> character A". With such a setting, the set value is suggested by executing the hold continuous effect.

FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the pending continuous staging process. The hold continuous staging process is a process executed in the ending staging process (S177). First, the effect control CPU 120 checks the inside of the hold storage buffer (248FS010), and determines whether or not there is a big hit hold storage (248FS011). When the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is a large hit hold memory (Y in 248FS011), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold sequence effect (248FS012) from the hold sequence effect determination table, and shifts to 248FS013. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hold storage of the big hit (N in 248FS011), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to 248FS015.

In 248FS013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold continuous effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the hold continuous effect is to be executed (Y in 248FS013), the effect content is determined by the effect determination table when the hold continuous effect is present (248FS014), and the process proceeds to 248FS016. Next, the effect control CPU 120 is set to execute the determined content (248FS016), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold continuous effect is not executed (N in 248FS013), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to 248FS015.

In the 248FS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect content by the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table. Here, the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-3 is used regardless of whether there is no hold storage of the jackpot or the hold continuous effect is not executed. As a result, even in the case of a big hit in which the hold continuous effect is not executed, the lottery for the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed every time, so that the interest in the big hit can be improved. Next, the effect control CPU 120 is set to execute the determined content (248FS016), and the process is terminated.

The continuation rate suggestion effect process and the continuation rate suggestion effect process may be collectively executed in the same flow. In such a case, in the case of a big hit from the normal state, the hold continuous effect may not be executed.

Further, in the hold continuous effect, the same character as the continuation rate suggestion effect appears, so that the interest of the game can be improved by combining the continuation rate suggestion effect and the hold continuous effect. It should be noted that different characters may be displayed for the hold continuous effect and the continuation rate suggestion effect.

(About the setting suggestion effect executed in the feature section 249F)
Next, the setting suggestion effect executed in the feature unit 249F will be described. FIG. 10-7 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 10-7 shows an example of the setting suggestion effect pattern A shown in FIG. 10-2 (B) when a big hit is made within the ST1 to 20th rotations. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the image display device 5 is subjected to an effect indicating that the jackpot has been achieved at the time of the jackpot. Further, in the upper right of the screen, the remaining number display 249F001 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed. The remaining number of times display is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is executed once. FIG. 10-7 (A) shows a case where a big hit is achieved with the remaining 97 rotations of the third rotation.

Next, the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 10-7 (B) is executed during the period during the jackpot round. In the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect using the push button 31B is executed as the setting suggestion effect for the number of times corresponding to the remaining number of times up to ST20. On the right side of the screen, a setting suggestion residual image 249F002 showing the number of times of the remaining setting suggestion effect is displayed. Further, a button image 249F003 imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining number of setting suggestion effects is indicated by the characters "Chance is 17 times!" At the upper part. In this way, if the jackpot is hit as soon as possible in the ST period, the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect will increase. The execution rate of the production can be increased.

FIG. 10-7 (C) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (C), when the pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is selected or the push button 31B is not operated, the setting suggestion effect is not executed and what is displayed on the screen. Is not displayed. On the other hand, FIG. 10-7 (D) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (D), when the pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is selected and the player operates the push button 31B, the character image 249F004 is displayed on the screen as the setting suggestion effect. To.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of button images 249F003 shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) may be provided. For example, a button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A may be provided, and when the stick controller 31A is operated, the character image 249F004 may appear at a higher rate than when the push button 31B is operated. Further, when the button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A is displayed, the appearance ratio of any one of the plurality of types of character images 249F004 may be increased. For example, when the button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A is displayed, the character D suggesting a high setting may appear at a high rate, or the character D may always appear (character D is confirmed). May be good. Further, even if only one operating means is used, the appearance ratio of the character image that appears may be different depending on the change in the shape, color, or the like of the button image.

Further, the character image 249F004 shown in FIG. 10-7 (D) may appear more than once because the setting suggestion effect by the button image 249F003 is executed a plurality of times. In such a case, when the second and subsequent character images 249F004 are displayed, they may be displayed in parallel with the character image 249F004 displayed in the previous operation. Further, the previous display may be updated so that a new character image 249F004 may be displayed. Further, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect may be increased by changing the display mode of the previous character image 249F004 (for example, the reliability of the color of the clothes, which poses with a high reliability of the setting suggestion effect). Change to a higher color, etc.). Further, the reliability may be displayed as a percentage together with the plurality of character images 249F004 to increase the percentage display corresponding to the character image 249F004 corresponding to the actual set value. By doing so, it is possible to improve the reliability of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times.

FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table. In the setting suggestion effect determination table, when the big hit is within 1 to 20 rotations in the ST period, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed, which effect (character A, A table used to determine whether to execute character B, character C or character D). The setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

As shown in the setting suggestion effect determination table, in setting 1, the ratio determined without effect is 88%, the ratio determined by character A is 5%, the ratio determined by character B is 4%, and the ratio determined by character C is The determined ratio is 3%, and there is no determined ratio for character D (0%). In setting 2, the ratio determined without effect is 88%, the ratio determined by character A is 3%, the ratio determined by character B is 5%, the ratio determined by character C is 4%, and the ratio determined by character D is 4%. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 3, the ratio determined without effect is 87%, the ratio determined by character A is 3%, the ratio determined by character B is 4%, the ratio determined by character C is 5%, and the ratio determined by character D is 5%. The percentage determined to be 1%.

Due to the setting of the data shown in FIG. 10-8, in the setting suggestion effect processing, when the big hit is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST, the ratio of selecting no effect is high, and it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect. It has become. When the setting suggestion effect is executed, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is "character A> character B> character C" in the case of setting 1 and "character B" in the case of setting 2. > Character C> Character A ", and in the case of setting 3," Character C> Character B> Character A ". That is, since the appearance rate of the character differs depending on the set value, it is possible to suggest the set value from the aspect of the character. Further, since the character D appears only in the most advantageous setting 3, it is confirmed that the setting ratio of the character D is the lowest, but when it appears, the setting 3 is a high setting. It should be noted that any character may be displayed at a rate of 100% without being determined without the effect.

FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting suggestion effect processing. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the jackpot medium effect process (S176). First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (249FS001). By checking the number of times stored in the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of variable displays during ST, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST. judge. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (Y at 249FS001), the effect content of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the setting suggestion effect determination table according to the set value. Determined (249FS002) and move to 249FS003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is not a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (N at 249FS001), the process ends.

In 249FS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (Y in 249FS003), the effect control CPU 120 is set to execute the setting suggestion effect according to the number of remaining STs (249FS004), and ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is not executed (N in 249FS003), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the setting suggestion effect is produced when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST and when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST. The execution ratio is different (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times). By doing so, in the ST state, when the game is controlled to the big hit game state at any number of 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, and at any number of 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST, a big hit is made. Since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different from that when the game state is controlled, it is possible to pay attention to the execution trigger of the effect suggesting the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

In particular, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST (at the 21st to 100th revolutions). Since the setting suggestion effect is not executed), the big hit game state is controlled from the start of the ST to the 1st to 20th rotations, so that the big hit game state is continuous, which improves the interest and draws attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect. be able to.

Further, since the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST are the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotations, the big hit game is performed at the 1st to 20th rotations earlier than the 21st to 100th rotations when controlled to the ST state. Even if it is controlled by the state, it is possible to prevent the person from thinking that he / she has lost (for example, he / she cannot fully see the effect of seeing only during ST).

Further, the period from the start of ST to the 20th rotation or less is set as a period including the 1st to 20th rotations but not the 21st to 100th rotations. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled within a predetermined period. In addition, if the period from the start of ST to the 20th rotation or less is a special period in which the setting suggestion effect may be executed when controlled to the big hit game state, the effect indicating that the setting suggestion effect may be executed is executed. good. For example, in the period from the start of ST to the 20th rotation, the background may be changed or a telop indicating that it is a special period may be displayed.

Further, for the 21st to 100th rotations including the 1st to 20th rotations, the lottery for the setting suggestion effect is not executed by the same table, but a lottery is performed using a different table for each variable display once or multiple times. May be executed. In such a case, the earlier the number of times, the higher the ratio and reliability of the setting suggestion effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8, when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the setting is more reliable than when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST. Since the suggestion effect is executed (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times), the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is high. The high reliability of the setting suggestion effect means that the setting difference becomes more remarkable, which makes it easier for the player to guess which setting value. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(About the modified example of the feature part 249F)
FIG. 10-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table of the modified example. FIG. 10-10 (A) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations, and FIG. 10-10 (B) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations. As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the modified example, different tables are used for ST1 to 20 rotations and ST21 to 100 rotations, but the setting suggestion effect is executed regardless of the number of fluctuations. Further, in the modified example, the setting suggestion effect in which some character appears is executed regardless of the number of ST hits. These tables are stored in ROM 121.

The setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations in FIG. 10-10 (A) shows any setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C) when the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST. Or a table used to determine whether to execute character D). In setting 1, the ratio determined by character A is 50%, the ratio determined by character B is 30%, the ratio determined by character C is 20%, and the ratio determined by character D is not (at 0%). be). In setting 2, the ratio determined by character A is 20%, the ratio determined by character B is 50%, the ratio determined by character C is 30%, and the ratio determined by character D is not (at 0%). be). In setting 3, the ratio determined by the character A is 20%, the ratio determined by the character B is 30%, the ratio determined by the character C is 40%, and the ratio determined by the character D is 10%.

The setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations in FIG. 10-10 (B) shows any setting suggestion effect (character A) in the setting suggestion effect process when the jackpot is within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. , Character B, character C or character D). In setting 1, the ratio determined by character A is 40%, the ratio determined by character B is 30%, the ratio determined by character C is 30%, and the ratio determined by character D is not (at 0%). be). In setting 2, the ratio determined by character A is 30%, the ratio determined by character B is 40%, the ratio determined by character C is 30%, and the ratio determined by character D is not (at 0%). be). In setting 3, the ratio determined by the character A is 30%, the ratio determined by the character B is 30%, the ratio determined by the character C is 35%, and the ratio determined by the character D is 5%.

Due to the data settings shown in FIGS. 10-10 (A) and 10-10, if a big hit occurs between the start of ST and the end of ST in the setting suggestion effect processing, no effect is not selected. , One of the effects is always executed. The ratio selected as the effect to be executed differs depending on whether it is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST or within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. If it is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is "Character A> Character B> Character C" in the case of setting 1 and "Character B" in the case of setting 2. > Character C> Character A ", and in the case of setting 3," Character C> Character B> Character A> Character D ". Further, in the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is "Character A> Character B = Character C" in the case of setting 1 and "Character C" in the case of setting 2. "Character B> Character A = Character C", and in the case of setting 3, "Character C> Character A = Character B> Character D".

With such a setting, the character corresponding to the set value in both the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST and the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST is character A in setting 1 and character B in setting 2. In setting 3, the appearance rate of the character C is high. However, the appearance rate of the character having the highest appearance rate in each set value is higher in the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. Therefore, it can be said that the reliability of the set value for the character is higher in the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. Further, if the character D appears regardless of the number of fluctuations, it is confirmed that the setting 3 is set. It should be noted that the content of the effect to be executed may be different between the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST and the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST.

(About the setting suggestion effect performed on the feature section 250F)
Next, the setting suggestion effect executed in the feature unit 250F will be described. FIG. 10-11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of a setting suggestion effect. FIG. 10-11 shows an example of the setting suggestion effect pattern B shown in FIG. 10-2 (C), when a big hit is made within ST1 to 20th rotation and when a big hit is made within ST21 to 100th rotation. ing. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), which is the time when a big hit is made within the first to 20th rotations of ST, the image display device 5 is subjected to an effect indicating that the big hit was made at the time of the big hit. Further, in the upper right of the screen, the remaining number display 250F001 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed. The remaining number of times display is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is executed once. FIG. 10-11 (A) shows a case where a big hit is achieved with the remaining 97 rotations of the third rotation after the start of ST.

Next, during the jackpot round, the first setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is executed. In the first setting suggestion effect, a darts effect is executed in which the arrow image 250F002 is applied toward the target image 250F004 on which "○" and "×" are drawn. When a big hit is made within the 1st to 20th rotations of ST, an effect of being able to throw an arrow four times at any rotation speed is executed. The "chance is 4 times!" At the top of the target image 250F004 is a character indicating that there is an effect that the arrow can be thrown 4 times. When the push button 31B is pressed while the button image 250F003 imitating the push button 31B displayed at the lower right of the screen is displayed, the arrow image 250F002 flies toward the target image 250F004.

FIG. 10-11 (C) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (C), when the arrow image 250F002 hits the “x” of the target image 250F004, the “x” which is the failure image 250F005 indicating that the setting suggestion effect has failed is displayed on the screen. It is displayed in the center. On the other hand, FIG. 10-11 (D) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (D), when the arrow image 250F002 hits the “◯” of the target image 250F004, for example, the character D image 250F006 is displayed from a plurality of characters as the setting suggestion effect is successful. To.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (E), which is the time when a big hit is made within ST21 to 100th rotation, the image display device 5 is subjected to an effect indicating that the big hit was made at the time of the big hit. Further, in the upper right of the screen, the remaining number display 250F001 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed. The remaining number of times display is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is executed once. FIG. 10-11 (E) shows a case where a big hit is achieved with the remaining 45 rotations at the 55th rotation after the start of ST.

Next, during the jackpot round, the second setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-11 (F) is executed. In the second setting suggestion effect, a bowling effect is executed in which the pin image 250F008 is defeated by throwing the ball image 250F007 toward the six pin images 250F008. When a big hit is made within the 21st to 100th rotations of ST, a bowling effect is executed in which the ball can be thrown twice at any rotation speed. The "chance is twice!" At the top of the pin image 250F008 is a character indicating that there is an effect that the ball can be thrown twice. When the push button 31B is pressed while the button image 250F003 imitating the push button 31B displayed at the lower right of the screen is displayed, the ball image 250F007 rolls toward the pin image 250F008.

FIG. 10-11 (G) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (G), when the ball image 250F007 does not hit the pin image 250F008, or when all the pin images 250F008 do not collapse in one throw, it indicates that the setting suggestion effect has failed. The "x" which is the failure image 250F005 is displayed in the center of the screen. On the other hand, FIG. 10-11 (H) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (H), when the ball image 250F007 hits the pin image 250F008 and all the pin images 250F008 collapse, it is considered that the setting suggestion effect is successful, and the character C image 250F009, for example, from a plurality of characters. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is obtained when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST and when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST. different. By doing so, in the ST state, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the game is controlled to the big hit game state at the 1st to 20th rotations or the big hit game state at the 21st to 100th rotations. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the execution opportunity of the production that suggests the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

FIG. 10-12 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table. 10-12 (A) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations, and FIG. 10-12 (B) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations. These tables are stored in ROM 121.

The setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations in FIG. 10-12 (A) indicates whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST in the setting suggestion effect process. When executing, it is a table used for deciding which setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) to execute. In setting 1, the ratio determined without effect is 82%, the ratio determined by character A is 7%, the ratio determined by character B is 6%, the ratio determined by character C is 5%, and the ratio determined by character D is 5%. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 2, the ratio determined without effect is 82%, the ratio determined by character A is 5%, the ratio determined by character B is 7%, the ratio determined by character C is 6%, and the ratio determined by character D is. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 3, the ratio determined without effect is 77%, the ratio determined for character A is 5%, the ratio determined for character B is 6%, the ratio determined for character C is 7%, and the ratio determined for character D is character D. The percentage determined to be is 5%.

The setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations in FIG. 10-12 (B) shows whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the big hit is within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST in the setting suggestion effect process. When executing, it is a table used for deciding which setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) to execute. In setting 1, the ratio determined without effect is 88%, the ratio determined by character A is 5%, the ratio determined by character B is 4%, the ratio determined by character C is 3%, and the ratio determined by character D is 3%. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 2, the ratio determined without effect is 88%, the ratio determined by character A is 3%, the ratio determined by character B is 5%, the ratio determined by character C is 4%, and the ratio determined by character D is 4%. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 3, the ratio determined without effect is 86%, the ratio determined by character A is 3%, the ratio determined by character B is 4%, the ratio determined by character C is 5%, and the ratio determined by character D is D. The percentage determined to be 2%.

By setting the data shown in FIGS. 10-12 (A) and 10-12 (B), in the setting suggestion effect processing, if the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST, the number of rotations from the start of ST does not matter. , No effect is selected at a high rate, making it difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect is executed, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is "character A> character B> character C" in the case of setting 1, and "character B> character" in the case of setting 2. "C> Character A", and in the case of setting 3, "Character C> Character B> Character A".

With such a setting, the character corresponding to the set value in both the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST and the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST is character A in setting 1 and character B in setting 2. In setting 3, the appearance rate of the character C is high. However, the appearance ratio is higher in the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. Therefore, it can be said that the reliability of the set value for the character is higher in the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. In addition, character D is used regardless of the number of fluctuations.
When appears, it is confirmed that the setting is 3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST. Is high. By doing so, by controlling the jackpot at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the jackpot gaming state is continuous, which improves the interest and makes it possible to pay attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

Further, since the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST are the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotations, the big hit game is performed at the 1st to 20th rotations earlier than the 21st to 100th rotations when controlled to the ST state. Even if it is controlled by the state, it is possible to prevent the person from thinking that he / she has lost (for example, he / she cannot fully see the effect of seeing only during ST).

Further, the period from the start of ST to the 20th rotation or less is set as a period including the 1st to 20th rotations but not the 21st to 100th rotations. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled within a predetermined period. In addition, during the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST, an effect indicating that the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed when controlled to the big hit game state is higher than that after the 21st rotation is executed. You can do it. For example, in the period from the start of ST to the 20th rotation, the background may be changed or a telop indicating that it is a special period may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the setting is more reliable than when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST. Suggestion production is executed. The high reliability of the setting suggestion effect means that the setting difference becomes more remarkable, which makes it easier for the player to guess which setting value. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST state, and the interest of the game is improved.

FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting suggestion effect processing. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the jackpot medium effect process (S176).

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (250FS001). By checking the number of times stored in the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of variable displays during ST, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST. judge. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (Y at 250FS001), the effect content of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations. Determined (250FS002) and shift to 250FS003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is not a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (N at 250FS001), it shifts to 250FS005.

In 250FS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (Y at 250FS003), the effect control CPU 120 sets the darts effect to be performed four times as the setting suggestion effect (250FS004), and ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is not executed (N at 250FS003), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

In 250FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit is a big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. By checking the number of times stored in the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of variable displays during ST, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot is within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. judge. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot is within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST (Y at 250FS005), the effect content of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations. Determined (250FS006) and shift to 250FS007. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is not a big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST (N at 250FS005), the process ends.

In 250FS007, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (Y at 250FS007), the effect control CPU 120 sets the bowling effect to be performed twice as the setting suggestion effect (250FS008), and ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is not executed (N at 250FS007), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be executed without fail when a big hit occurs during ST. Even in such a case, the big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST is executed at a higher rate than the big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. It is desirable to do so. Further, the appearance rate of only the character having the highest appearance rate corresponding to the set value may be different depending on the rotation speed from the start of ST.

(About the modified example of the feature part)
Although the feature portions 248F to 250F have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention. Hereinafter, modifications of the feature portions 248F to 250F will be described.

The continuation rate suggestion effect of FIG. 10-2 (A) may be executed at the start of the ST state, which is the start of the special state, and at the end of the ST state, which is the end of the special state. Specifically, the continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed at at least one of the start of the ST period (ST1 rotation) and the end of the ST period (ST100 rotation). In such a case, a fluctuation pattern that is not selected in the ST2 to 99th rotations may be selected as the fluctuation pattern. In particular, at the 100th rotation, a long fluctuation pattern is selected in order to display the acquired balls, so that the continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed according to the ball output display period. .. Further, as the continuation rate suggestion effect, an effect suggested by the color of the effect around the screen of the image display device 5, an effect suggested by the aspect of the character, an effect suggested by the display content of the character, and an effect suggested by the character aspect. At least one of (for example, the color of the light guide plate that reflects the light incident from the side and emits to the front side) may be executed.

Further, when the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed, it is not automatically executed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 side, but is executed by the player operating the operating means at a timing different from the usual one or by a different method. You may do it. Specifically, the continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed when the back button operation is executed by pressing and holding the button or inputting a command such as a cross key.

An effect control command for designating a display result is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 side by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Then, the above-mentioned hold continuous effect may be executed based on the reception of the command. In such a case, if the staging control command for specifying the display result is not normal due to some influence, the staging control CPU 120 limits the execution of the hold continuous staging of the staging mode similar to the continuation rate suggestion staging. do it. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting erroneous information to the player. It should be noted that the effect to be restricted may be determined in advance, such as not executing only the effect in which the character D whose high setting is fixed appears.

The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 transmits information regarding the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 of FIG. 9-9, step 112IWS108 of FIG. 9-13, and the like. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-4, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuation rate suggestion effect based on the information regarding the set value. In such a case, if the setting value command is not normal as the information regarding the setting value, the effect control CPU 120 may limit the execution of the continuation rate suggestion effect of high continuation determination. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous set value without reducing the number of executions of the continuation rate suggestion effect. In addition, instead of limiting, a continuation rate suggestion effect suggesting low continuation may be executed.

The continuation rate suggestion effect and the hold continuous effect are not merely effects that make a character appear, but are effects that show the continuation rate, etc. as a result of performing some kind of effect such as the above-mentioned roulette effect or boring effect. May be good.

Regarding the continuation rate suggestion effect, the case where the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed when it is not a big hit from the normal state has been explained. However, even if it is a big hit from the normal state, the continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed. Further, in such a case, the hold continuous effect may be executed at the same time, or the execution of the hold continuous effect may be restricted (such as not executing the hold continuous effect at the first hit).

The continuation rate suggestion effect may be made to have higher reliability by continuously entering the ST state. By doing so, the interest of the game when the ST state continues is improved. On the contrary, when the ST state ends immediately (for example, it ends in ST 1 time), the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed at the end of ST, and in that case, the continuation rate suggestion effect is performed by the highly reliable table. It should be executed. In this way, the set value is suggested even if the ST state ends at an early stage, so if the possibility of a high setting is suggested, it is possible to encourage the player to continue the game. , The interest is improved.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST than when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST. It was getting higher. However, when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST. Specifically, when the number of times is just before the end of ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than when the number of times is immediately after the start of ST. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect while giving a sense of security when the game is controlled to the big hit game state at a later number of times than after the start of the ST when the ST state is controlled. ..

The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 transmits information regarding the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 of FIG. 9-9, step 112IWS108 of FIG. 9-13, and the like. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect process of FIG. 10-9 based on the information regarding the set value. In such a case, if the setting value command is not normal as the information regarding the setting value, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous set value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed. In addition, without making a tentative decision (temporary setting) to execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting, only the pattern of confirming the high setting is not executed, and the setting suggestion effect selected by lottery is executed. It may be done. Further, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-7, in the invention relating to the feature portion 249F, the case where the effect using the operation means for the remaining number of times up to the 20th rotation of ST is executed has been described. However, the effect using the operating means may not be executed. Further, instead of drawing lots for each remaining number of times, the lottery may be executed with a plurality of times as one setting suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST than when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST. It was getting higher. However, when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST. Specifically, when the number of times is just before the end of ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than when the number of times is immediately after the start of ST. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect while giving a sense of security when the game is controlled to the big hit game state at a later number of times than after the start of the ST when the ST state is controlled. ..

The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 transmits information regarding the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 of FIG. 9-9, step 112IWS108 of FIG. 9-13, and the like. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect process of FIG. 10-13 based on the information regarding the set value. In such a case, if the setting value command is not normal as the information regarding the setting value, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous set value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed. In addition, without making a tentative decision (temporary setting) to execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting, only the pattern of confirming the high setting is not executed, and the setting suggestion effect selected by lottery is executed. It may be done. Further, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

In the continuation rate suggestion effect of FIG. 10-3, the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 10-8, and the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 10-12, the presence / absence of the effect and the character when the effect is executed are determined at the same time. However, a table for determining the presence or absence of the effect and a table for determining the character when the effect is executed may be provided separately.

The continuation rate suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect may be executed not only when the jackpot is controlled but also when the hit is off. Further, in such a case, various effects may be executed when the ST period ends without executing the big hit or when such a state continues a plurality of times.

The round in which the setting suggestion effect pattern A and the setting suggestion effect pattern B are executed may be predetermined. In addition, the round to be executed may be determined by a random lottery. Further, these effects may be executed during the ending period. Further, the execution timing may be different depending on the remaining number of STs.

The controls in the feature unit may be applied in combination with each other. Thereby, the effect related to the setting suggestion can be suitably executed.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the feature portion 248F)
As described above, the feature portion 248F includes the inventions shown below with respect to the feature portion 248F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of multiple stages of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting values. rice field. In such a pachinko machine, the giraffe, during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value,
There was a gaming machine that displayed either an elephant or a lion and executed a suggestion of a set value (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). Further, there is a gaming machine in which a high probability state is maintained until a specific number of times of variable display of identification information is executed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044).

However, when performing an effect suggesting a setting as in JP 2010-200902 on a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044, there is room for improvement in the effect suggesting the setting. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 248F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process). ,
A special state control means that can control a special state (for example, ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed after the end of the advantageous state (for example, ST state). For example, with CPU103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the ST continuation rate differs).
It is possible to execute a continuation rate suggestion effect that suggests to the player the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)). be).

According to such a configuration, since the continuation rate suggestion effect that suggests the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state is executed to the player, it is possible to draw attention to the effect that suggests the setting, and the interest of the game is enhanced. improves.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The continuation rate suggestion effect is an effect executed at the end of the advantageous state (for example, the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed during the ending period).

With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the end of the advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
A plurality of types of the effect mode of the continuation rate suggestion effect are provided, and the effect mode that can be executed regardless of the set value is included (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the characters A to C are any set value. Even if it is feasible).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suggest a set value, and the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above
The plurality of types of the continuation rate suggestion effects include an effect mode in which it is determined that the high continuation rate is set to be highly advantageous to the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the high continuation rate). Character D that is confirmed to be set in setting 3 is included).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suggest a set value, and the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
A hold storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can store information related to variable display as hold storage information, and
A determination means (for example, S110 in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not to make the advantageous state based on the reserved storage information, and
Prior to the determination of the determination means, a determination means for determining whether or not to obtain the advantageous state (for example, S101 in FIG. 5) and
In the advantageous state, when the reserved storage information determined to be controlled in the advantageous state is stored in the reserved storage means based on the determination result of the determination means, the reserved storage means is controlled to the advantageous state. Further provided with a hold continuous effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold continuous effect of FIG. 10-6) capable of executing the hold continuous effect.
The hold continuous effect executing means can execute the hold continuous effect having the same effect mode as the continuation rate suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the hold continuous effect is the same as the continuation rate suggestion effect. Appear the character of).

According to such a configuration, the fun of the game is improved by combining the continuation rate suggestion effect and the hold continuous effect.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above
Further, a determination information output means (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting determination information (for example, an effect control command for designating a display result) regarding the determination result of the determination means is further provided.
The holding continuous effect execution means is
The hold continuous effect is executed based on the determination information output from the determination information output means (for example, the hold continuous effect is executed based on the effect control command for specifying the display result).
When the determination information output from the determination information output means is not normal, the execution of the hold continuous effect having at least the same effect mode as the continuation rate suggestion effect is restricted (for example, an effect control for designating a display result). If the command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 limits the execution of the hold continuous effect of the same effect mode as the continuation rate suggestion effect).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting erroneous information to the player.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Further equipped with an operation means (for example, push button 31B) that can be operated by the player,
The continuation rate suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the operating means (for example, the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

According to such a configuration, the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 9-9, FIG. 9-13). Step 112 IWS108) and
Based on the set value information output from the set value information output means, the continuation rate suggestion effect executing means capable of executing the continuation rate suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the continuation rate suggestion effect of FIG. 10-4). ) And more
It is confirmed that the continuation rate suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined continuation rate that is at least advantageous to the player when the set value information output from the set value information output means is not normal. The execution of the continuation rate suggestion effect is restricted (for example, when the set value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 limits the execution of the continuation rate suggestion effect of high setting confirmation).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous set value without reducing the number of executions of the continuation rate suggestion effect.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the feature portion 249F)
As described above, the feature section 249F includes the inventions shown below relating to the feature section 249F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of multiple stages of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting values. rice field. In such a pachinko gaming machine, one of giraffe, elephant, and lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value, and the suggestion of the set value is executed. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092). Further, there is a gaming machine in which a high probability state is maintained until a specific number of times of variable display of identification information is executed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044).

However, when executing an effect suggesting a setting as in JP 2010-200902 on a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044, there is room for improvement in the execution opportunity of the effect suggesting the setting. rice field. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 249F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process). ,
A special state control means that can control a special state (for example, ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed after the end of the advantageous state (for example, ST state). For example, with CPU103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the ST continuation rate differs).
In the special state, it is controlled to the advantageous state when it is controlled to the advantageous state in the first number of times and when it is controlled to the advantageous state in the second number of times different from the first number of times. The execution rate of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, and 21 to 21 from the start of ST. The execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is different from that when the jackpot is controlled at the 100th rotation (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th rotations).

According to such a configuration, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect differs between the case where the special state is controlled to the advantageous state in the first time and the case where the setting is controlled to the advantageous state in the second time. It is possible to draw attention to the execution opportunity of the production that suggests the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a predetermined game a plurality of times (for example, a state in which a round game is repeated).
The setting suggestion effect is an effect executed during the predetermined game (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the round).

With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to a predetermined game, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
When the first number of times is controlled to the advantageous state, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the second number of times is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in FIG. 10-9). As shown, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th revolutions from the start of ST (211th to 100th rotations). Then, the setting suggestion effect is not executed)).

According to such a configuration, by being controlled to the advantageous state in the first time, the interest can be improved by the continuous advantageous state, and the execution of the setting suggestion effect can be focused on.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
The second number of times is the number of times after the first number of times (for example, the 21st to 100th rotations are the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotations).

According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to the special state, even if it is controlled to the advantageous state earlier than the second number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that he / she has lost.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
The first number of times is a number of times after the second number of times (for example, the first number of times is the number of times just before the end of ST, and the second number of times is the number of times immediately after the start of ST).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect while giving a sense of security when the special state is controlled and the advantageous state is controlled later than the second time. ..

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
In the special state, a predetermined period including the first number of times but not including the second number of times is provided (for example, the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is the first number of times. Includes certain 1st to 20th rotations, but does not include 21st to 100th rotations, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the advantageous state is controlled within a predetermined period.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 9-9, FIG. 9-13). Step 112 IWS108) and
With the setting suggestion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the setting suggestion effect process of FIG. 10-9) capable of executing the setting suggestion effect based on the set value information output from the set value information output means. Further prepared,
When the set value information output from the set value information output means is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing means sets a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, when the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the low setting suggestion effect).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous setting value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(8) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process). ,
A special state control means that can control a special state (for example, ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed after the end of the advantageous state (for example, ST state). For example, with CPU103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the ST continuation rate differs).
In the special state, when the control is performed in the advantageous state in the first number of times, the control is performed in the advantageous state as compared with the case where the control is performed in the advantageous state in the second number of times different from the first number of times. The reliability of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is high (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-8, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, 21 to 21 from the start of ST. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed with higher reliability than when the jackpot is controlled at the 100th rotation (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times), the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is high).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect when the special state is controlled to the advantageous state in the first time, and the interest of the game is improved.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the feature portion 250F)
As described above, the feature portion 250F includes the inventions shown below relating to the above-mentioned feature portion 250F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of multiple stages of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting values. rice field. In such a pachinko gaming machine, one of giraffe, elephant, and lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value, and the suggestion of the set value is executed. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092). Further, there is a gaming machine in which a high probability state is maintained until a specific number of times of variable display of identification information is executed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044).

However, when executing an effect suggesting a setting as in JP 2010-200902 on a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044, there is room for improvement in the execution opportunity of the effect suggesting the setting. rice field. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 250F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process). ,
A special state control means that can control a special state (for example, ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed after the end of the advantageous state (for example, ST state). For example, with CPU103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the ST continuation rate differs).
In the special state, it is controlled to the advantageous state when it is controlled to the advantageous state in the first number of times and when it is controlled to the advantageous state in the second number of times different from the first number of times. The production mode of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, and 21 to 21 from the start of ST. The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is different from that when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation).

According to such a configuration, in the special state, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is different between the case where the first time is controlled to the advantageous state and the time when the second time is controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible to draw attention to the execution opportunity of the production that suggests the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a predetermined game a plurality of times (for example, a state in which a round game is repeated).
The setting suggestion effect is an effect executed during the predetermined game (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the round).

With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to a predetermined game, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
When the first number of times is controlled to the advantageous state, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the second number of times is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in FIG. 10-12). As shown, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST).

According to such a configuration, by being controlled to the advantageous state in the first time, the interest can be improved by the continuous advantageous state, and the execution of the setting suggestion effect can be focused on.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
The second number of times is the number of times after the first number of times (for example, the 21st to 100th rotations are the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotations).

According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to the special state, even if it is controlled to the advantageous state earlier than the second number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that he / she has lost.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
The first number of times is a number of times after the second number of times (for example, the first number of times is the number of times just before the end of ST, and the second number of times is the number of times immediately after the start of ST).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect while giving a sense of security when the special state is controlled and the advantageous state is controlled later than the second time. ..

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
In the special state, a predetermined period including the first number of times but not including the second number of times is provided (for example, the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is the first number of times. Includes certain 1st to 20th rotations, but does not include 21st to 100th rotations, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the advantageous state is controlled within a predetermined period.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 9-9, FIG. 9-13). Step 112 IWS108) and
With the setting suggestion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the setting suggestion effect process of FIG. 10-13) capable of executing the setting suggestion effect based on the set value information output from the set value information output means. Further prepared,
When the set value information output from the set value information output means is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing means sets a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, when the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the low setting suggestion effect).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous setting value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(8) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process). ,
A special state control means that can control a special state (for example, ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed after the end of the advantageous state (for example, ST state). For example, with CPU103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the ST continuation rate differs).
In the special state, when the control is performed in the advantageous state in the first number of times, the control is performed in the advantageous state as compared with the case where the control is performed in the advantageous state in the second number of times different from the first number of times. The reliability of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is high (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, 21 to 21 from the start of ST. Since the setting suggestion effect with high reliability is executed as compared with the case where the jackpot is controlled at the 100th rotation, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is high).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect when the special state is controlled to the advantageous state in the first time, and the interest of the game is improved.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

(Explanation of feature section 109AK)
Next, the feature unit 109AK of the present embodiment will be described. In the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary symbol display 20, Although a plurality of types of display devices (displays) such as the normal figure holding display 25C are provided in different places, these display devices may be provided together. For example, as an information display means for displaying a plurality of game-related information (design display result, reserved storage number, etc.) related to the game, the information display device 109AK001 as shown in FIG. 11-1 (A) is displayed as shown in FIG. It should be provided in place of the device (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, first hold display 25A, second hold display 25B, ordinary symbol display 20, normal symbol hold display 25C). You may do it. The information display device 109AK001 may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position that the player can see from the front, a lower left, a lower right, etc. in the gaming area).

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 (A) and 11-1 (B), the information display device 109AK001 includes a plurality of display parts composed of lamps such as LEDs, and displays game-related information depending on the lighting / extinguishing status of each display part. do. Each display part of the information display device 109AK001 includes a first special symbol display device 109AK4A, a second special symbol display device 109AK4B, a first hold display 109AK25A, a second hold display 109AK25B, a normal symbol display 109AK20, and a normal drawing. The hold display is 109AK25C. Further, the information display device 109AK001 indicates a round number display 109AK011 indicating the total number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, a time saving state display 109AK012 indicating a time saving state, and a probability change state. It is provided with a display portion that serves as a probability change state display 109AK013. As described above, the information display device 109AK001 is one module for displaying a plurality of types of game-related information. Each display portion of the information display device 109AK001 is composed of, for example, the same LED. By doing so, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The first special symbol display device 109AK4A and the second special symbol display device 109AK4B are each composed of eight display parts (LEDs), and the display result (hit) is obtained by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight display parts (lighting pattern). Type) is displayed. It may be arbitrary which lighting pattern is assigned to the loss or hit type.

The first hold indicator 109AK25A and the second hold indicator 109AK25B are each composed of four display portions (LEDs), and display the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number according to the number of lighting thereof.

The ordinary symbol display 109AK20 is composed of four display parts (LEDs), and displays a display result (type of hit) by the lighting pattern of the four display parts. It may be arbitrary which lighting pattern is assigned to the loss or hit type.

The normal figure hold display 109AK25C is composed of four display parts (LEDs), and displays the normal figure hold storage number according to the number of lightings thereof.

The round number display 109AK011 is composed of six display parts (LEDs), and displays the total number of rounds in the big hit game state in the big hit game state by the lighting pattern of the six display parts. Which lighting pattern is assigned to which number of rounds may be arbitrary.

The time saving state display 109AK012 is composed of one display portion (LED) and lights up to indicate that the time saving state is in effect. The probabilistic state display 109AK013 is composed of one display portion (LED) and lights up to indicate that the probabilistic state is in the probable change state.

The shape of the information display device 109AK001 and the number, shape, and arrangement of the display parts may be arbitrary as long as various game-related information can be displayed. For example, the display portion of the information display device 109AK001 may be composed of 7-segment LEDs. Further, information other than the game-related information shown above may be displayed on the information display device 109AK001, or some game-related information may not be displayed.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, a RAM clearing process in which the range for clearing (initializing) the RAM 102 is different depending on the state (operation) at the time of starting is executed. As shown in FIG. 11-2, when the initialization operation (the clear switch is on, the setting key 112IW051 is off and the power is turned on) is performed at the time of startup, all the stored contents of the RAM 102 are cleared. When a power failure recovery operation (clear switch and setting key 112IW051 are turned off and the power is turned on) is performed at startup, all the stored contents of the RAM 102 are retained. When the setting change operation (clear switch and setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the power is turned on) is performed at startup, the information related to the special figure display result and the normal figure display result among the stored contents of the RAM 102 is retained, and other information is cleared. Will be done. The state in which the setting change operation is performed at startup and the setting value can be changed is also called the change permission state. If the setting change operation is performed at startup, the information related to the display result is retained, but the information related to the game state and the hold storage information are cleared, so that the initialization operation is performed and the setting change operation is performed. There is no difference in the degree of advantage for the player except for the set value. This makes it possible to provide a fair game. Note that FIG. 11-2 shows a part of the information stored in the RAM 102, but other information (various flags, determination results, etc.) is all information when the initialization operation is performed at startup. Is cleared and all information is retained when the power failure recovery operation is performed at startup. When the setting change operation is performed at the time of startup, other information may be cleared or arbitrary information may be retained.

11-3 to 11-6 are display operation examples of the information display device 109AK001 when the power is turned off during the startup of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then turned on.

In FIG. 11-3 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is running (power is ON), a lost symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A, and the first hold storage number is displayed on the first hold display 109AK25A. It is displayed that there are three. Further, the normal symbol display 109AK20 displays the normal map lost symbol, and the normal symbol hold display 109AK25C displays that the number of normal symbol hold storage is one. Then, when the time saving state display 109AK012 is lit, it is displayed that the gaming state is the time saving state. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off. After that, when the power failure recovery operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the stored contents of the RAM 102 are retained, and the control for displaying the game-related information is executed again based on the stored contents. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C), the information display device 109AK001 is restored to the display state before the power is turned off.

In FIG. 11-4 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is running, the lost symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A, and the normal symbol lost symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 109AK20. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off. After that, when the power failure recovery operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the stored contents of the RAM 102 are retained, and the control for displaying the game-related information is executed again based on the stored contents. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), the information display device 109AK001 is restored to the display state before the power is turned off.

In FIG. 11-5 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in operation, a lost symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A, and the first hold display 109AK25A has three first hold storage numbers. Is displayed. Further, the normal symbol display 109AK20 displays the normal map lost symbol, and the normal symbol hold display 109AK25C displays that the number of normal symbol hold storage is one. Then, when the time saving state display 109AK012 is lit, it is displayed that the gaming state is the time saving state. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off. After that, when the initialization operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the stored contents of the RAM 102 are erased. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C), the information display device 109AK001 is completely turned off even after the power is turned on.

In FIG. 11-6 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in operation, a lost symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A, and a normal symbol lost symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 109AK20. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off. After that, when the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are lit during the setting change (in the change permission state). .. When the change permission state ends, the information regarding the special map display result and the normal map display result among the stored contents of the RAM 102 is retained, and the control for displaying the game-related information is executed again based on the stored contents. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the lost symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A, the normal symbol lost symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 109AK20, and the display before the power is turned off. It becomes the same as the state.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, in this embodiment, when the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on (at startup), the information regarding the special figure display result and the normal figure display result is retained. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), even if the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the display result is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A and the normal symbol display device 109AK20 as before the power is turned off. can do. The display state of the information display device 109AK001 is the same as when the power failure recovery operation is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (C). Therefore, even if the player confirms the information display device 109AK001 when the hall is opened, it is difficult to know whether the power failure recovery operation has been executed or the setting change operation has been executed. In addition, since it is not possible to grasp whether or not the setting has been changed depending on the display state of the information display device 109AK001 at the time of startup, when the setting of some gaming machines is changed, it is not necessary to initialize the remaining gaming machines. It is possible to simplify the work of a person activating multiple gaming machines.

Further, it is preferable that the display of the image display device 5 at the time of activation is also common (for example, a screen indicating that the image has been activated) regardless of the operation at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing which operation was performed at the time of activation by the display of the image display device 5. In order to enable confirmation by hall employees and the like, the processing executed (initialization processing, restoration processing, setting change processing, etc.) may be displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of startup.

If the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on (when the power is started), the information other than the information related to the special figure display result and the normal map display result is cleared. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the first hold display 109AK25A, Even if the second hold indicator 109AK25B, the normal figure hold indicator 109AK25C, the round number indicator 109AK011, the time saving status indicator 109AK012, and the probability change status indicator 109AK013 are lit, the information related to these displays is cleared during the setting change operation. Therefore, after the setting change operation, these display parts are turned off.

(Modification example of feature part 109AK)
This feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Further, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate. For example, at least a part of the configurations of the feature portions 248F to 250F may be introduced into the feature portion.

In the above embodiment, when the initialization operation is performed when the power is turned on, the information display device 109AK001 is turned off completely after the power is turned on. However, when the initialization operation is performed when the power is turned on, the first The most frequently appearing symbol (for example, a lost symbol) may be displayed on the special symbol display device 109AK4A (or the second special symbol display device 109AK4B) and the normal symbol display device 109AK20. By doing so, even during the initialization operation, the display of the information display device 109AK001 at the time of startup is the same as during the power failure recovery operation or the setting change operation (for example, FIGS. 11-3 (C) and 11-6 (for example). D)) can be set, and the display can be made substantially common regardless of which operation was performed at the time of startup. As a result, even if the information display device 109AK001 is confirmed, it becomes more difficult to grasp which operation has been executed.

In the above embodiment, when the setting change operation is performed at the time of startup, the information regarding the special map display result and the normal map display result among the stored contents of the RAM 102 is retained, and the other information is cleared. , Some of the other information may be retained. Also, all the information may be cleared. In this case, when the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on, the symbol most frequently appearing on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A (or the second special symbol display device 109AK4B) and the normal symbol display 109AK20 (for example, a lost symbol) May be displayed. By doing so, even if the same RAM clear processing as in the initialization operation is executed during the setting change operation, the display of the information display device 109AK001 at startup is the same as during the power failure recovery operation or the setting change operation ( For example, FIG. 11-3 (C) and FIG. 11-6 (D) can be set, and the display can be made substantially common regardless of which operation was performed at the time of startup.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 109AK)
As a pachinko gaming machine in which a set value can be set, for example, those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have been proposed. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, the stored contents other than the set value are cleared when the setting change process is performed.
In such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the handling of information held at the time of setting change.
The gaming machine according to the feature unit 109AK is made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately retains information when a setting is changed and makes it difficult to determine whether or not the setting is changed. And.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 109AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Setting means that can be set to any setting value (for example, any of setting values 1 to 3) among a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13, etc.) )When,
A setting control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means based on the setting change permission operation, and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, an information display device 109AK001) that displays a plurality of game-related information related to the game.
The information display means is
When the power failure recovery operation is performed, the control for displaying all the game-related information displayed before the power failure recovery operation is executed again (for example, FIGS. 11-3 and 11-4).
When the change permission state is controlled based on the setting change permission operation, a control for displaying a part of the game-related information (of which it was displayed before the change permission operation) after the end of the change permission state. (For example, FIG. 11-6).
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
Equipped with variable display means to execute variable display
The game-related information may include at least information regarding the number of reserved variable displays (for example, the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number).
With such a configuration, important information about the game can be displayed.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
It is possible to execute an initialization process in which the initialization range of the storage area is different depending on whether the initialization operation is performed or the change permission state is controlled based on the setting change permission operation (for example, FIG. 11-). 2) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate initialization process according to the situation.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The game-related information displayed after the change permission state ends may include at least display results of special symbols and ordinary symbols.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The degree of advantage of the gaming machine is the same when the initialization operation is performed and when the setting change permission status is terminated (information on the gaming status is cleared as shown in FIG. 11-2). You may.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the difference in the degree of advantage for the player between the time of the initialization operation and the time of changing the setting.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
A game control means that controls the progress of the game,
A display control means for executing display control of the display means based on the information from the game control means is provided.
The display control means may execute the same display control when the initialization operation is performed and when the change permission state is terminated.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed.

(Explanation of feature 110AK)
Next, the feature portion 110AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the counting effect setting process related to the feature unit 110AK. In the feature unit 110AK, a counting effect of displaying a numerical value (for example, the numerical value of "3") on the image display device 5 and counting down the numerical value can be executed, and the numerical value is a specific value (for example) in the counting effect. When it becomes "0"), a specific effect for notifying that the expected degree (big hit reliability, etc.) of the variable display being executed is high is executed. The counting effect setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the counting effect and the effect mode (counting value) when the counting effect is executed. The counting effect setting process is executed, for example, by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7.

In the counting effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS001). In this embodiment, whether or not the counting effect is executed is determined based on the display result specified from the variable display result notification command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. Further, whether or not the counting effect is executed is determined at a different rate depending on which is the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-8 shows the determination ratio of whether or not the counting effect is executed in step 110AKS001. FIG. 11-8 (A) shows the determination ratio (counting effect execution ratio) when the set value is 3, and FIG. 11-8 (B) shows the determination ratio (counting effect) when the set value is 2. (Execution ratio), and FIG. 11-8 (C) shows a determination ratio (execution ratio of counting effect) when the set value is 1.

As shown in FIGS. 11-8, when the display result is a big hit, the counting effect is more likely to be executed than when the display result is super reach loss or other (non-reach loss or normal reach loss). Further, when the display result is super reach loss, it is easier to execute the counting effect than when it is other (non-reach loss or normal reach loss). By doing so, when the counting effect is executed, the ratio of big hits and super reach is higher than when the counting effect is not executed, and the player's expectation can be raised by the counting effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8, in the feature unit 110AK, the execution ratio of the counting effect differs depending on the set value. Specifically, the rate at which the counting effect is executed is the highest when the setting value 3 with the highest jackpot probability is 3, and the rate at which the counting effect is executed is the lowest when the setting value 1 with the lowest jackpot probability is 1. It has become. In this way, the higher the set value, the easier it is to decide to execute the counting effect. By doing so, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player depending on the execution frequency of the counting effect. When it is suggested that the value is high, the player can be encouraged to play for a long period of time, and the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. In FIG. 11-8, when the display result is a big hit, the execution ratio of the counting effect is constant (50%) regardless of the set value, but the execution ratio of the counting effect may be different depending on the set value.

After determining whether or not to execute the counting effect in step 110AKS001, it is determined whether or not it is determined to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS002). If it is determined not to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS002; No), the counting effect setting process is terminated.

When it is determined to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS002; Yes), the final counting value (how many countdowns from the initial value "3") in the counting effect is determined (step 110AKS003). In this embodiment, the final counting value in the counting effect is determined based on the display result specified from the variable display result notification command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. Further, the final counting value in the counting effect is determined at a different ratio depending on which is the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-9 shows the determination ratio of the final count value in step 110AKS003. As shown in FIG. 11-10, the counting effect of the counting value "3" in FIG. 11-9 is a counting effect in which the numerical value of "3" is displayed and the numerical value is erased as it is. As shown in FIG. 11-10, the counting effect of the counting value "2" in FIG. 11-9 is a counting in which the numerical value of "3" is displayed and changes from "3" to "2", and then the numerical value is deleted. It is a production. As shown in FIG. 11-10, the counting effect of the counting value "1" in FIG. 11-9 is after the numerical value of "3" is displayed and gradually changes from "3" to "2" to "1". , It is a counting effect that the numerical value is erased. As shown in FIG. 11-10, the counting effect of the counting value "0" in FIG. 11-9 displays the numerical value of "3" and is stepwise in the order of "3" → "2" → "1" → "0". After changing to, the numerical value is erased, and then a specific effect for notifying that the degree of expectation is high is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when the display result is a big hit, it is easy to determine the count value "0", and when the display result is other (non-reach loss or normal reach loss), the count value. It is not determined to be "0". By doing so, it is possible to increase the probability of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the numerical value is counted down (counted) to "0" by the counting effect and the specific effect is executed, and the specific effect is executed. If it is done, at least the super reach is lost, so that the player's expectation can be raised by the counting effect and the specific effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-9, in the feature unit 110AK, the determination ratio of the final count value differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the display result is a super reach loss, the higher the set value, the more difficult it is to determine the count value "0", and the higher the set value, the easier it is to determine a large value. In addition, when the display result is other, the higher the set value, the easier it is to determine a larger value. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the counting effect will end without executing the specific effect, and the higher the probability that the counting effect will end at the stage (intermediate) where the countdown (counting) does not proceed. By doing so, although the counting effect is executed, the player is discouraged because the counting effect ends at the stage where the countdown (counting) does not proceed and the specific effect is not executed, and the set value is high. Since it can be suggested, it is possible to improve the effect of the counting effect and improve the fun of the game. Further, when the set value is low, the countdown (counting) is easy to proceed, the count value is "0", and the specific effect is easy to be executed. Therefore, when the set value is low, the player can be expected that the numerical value becomes a specific value and the specific effect is executed, and the effect of the counting effect is improved.

Further, in the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-9, when the count value is "3", the set value is high, and when the count value is "2", the set value is 2. When the ratio is high and the count value is "1", the ratio where the set value is 1 is high. Therefore, when it ends with the count value "3", it suggests that the set value is 3, and when it ends with the count value "2", it suggests that the set value is 2, and the count value "1". If it ends with ", it can be suggested that the set value is 1. In this way, since the setting value corresponding to the auntie who ended the counting effect in the middle and the counting value at the time of ending is suggested, the suggestion of the setting value when the counting effect ends in the middle can be understood. It will be easier.

The determination ratios shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9 are examples. The higher the set value, the easier it is to execute the counting effect, and the higher the set value, the larger the counting value. As long as the lower the set value, the easier the counting progresses and the easier it is for the counting value to become "0", the execution rate of the counting effect and the determination rate of the counting value may be arbitrary. That is, the determination ratio may be arbitrary as long as the same effect as that of the above embodiment can be obtained.

After the final counting value in the counting effect is determined in step 110AKS003, the effect control pattern corresponding to the determination result is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 110AKS004), and the counting effect setting process is terminated. The effect control pattern set in step 110AKS004 is read in the effect processing during variable display in step S172 of FIG. 7, and the counting effect corresponding to the determination result is executed.

11-11 and 11-12 are examples of effect operation when the counting effect is executed. FIG. 11-11 (A) shows that the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the “left” and “right” of the image display device 5 are stopped to be in the reach mode. ing. After that, when developing into super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), an image indicating that it is super reach is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper left portion. ..

Here, when it is determined in the counting effect setting process to execute the counting effect in which the final counting value is "0", as shown in FIG. 11-11 (C), during the execution of the reach effect. , The numerical value of "3" is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right portion) of the image display device 5, and the numerical value is "3" → "2" as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (D) to (F). → It changes gradually from "1" to "0". Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (G), a specific effect is executed in which the numerical value is erased and the character image "heat" is displayed.

Next, other production operation examples will be described. FIG. 11-12 (A) shows that the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the “left” and “right” of the image display device 5 are stopped to be in the reach mode. ing. After that, when developing into super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (B), an image indicating that it is super reach is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper left portion. ..

Here, when it is determined in the counting effect setting process to execute the counting effect in which the final counting value is "3", as shown in FIG. 11-12 (C), during the execution of the reach effect. , The numerical value of "3" is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right portion) of the image display device 5. After that, the numerical value does not count down, and as shown in FIG. 11-12 (D), the numerical value is erased. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (E), the decorative symbol of the loss combination is derived and displayed. In this way, when the numerical value of the counting effect ends at the stage of "3", the jackpot reliability of the variable display becomes low, but it is suggested that the set value is high, so that the player's expectation is maintained. can do.

Although FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 show an example in which the counting effect is executed after the reach is established, the counting effect may be started before the reach is reached (before the left and right symbols are stopped). ..

(Modification example of feature unit 110AK)
This feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Further, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate. For example, at least a part of the configurations of the feature portions 248F to 250F may be introduced into the feature portion.

In the above embodiment, the initial value of the numerical value in the counting effect is "3" and the specific value is "0", but other numerical values may be used. For example, the initial value may be one of a plurality of types. By doing so, it can be expected that the closer the initial value of the numerical value is to the specific value, the more the numerical value becomes the specific value, so that the interest of the production is improved. Further, the numerical value in the counting effect is not limited to the one that counts down, and may be the one that counts up. In this case, when the counted-up numerical value becomes a specific value, the specific effect may be executed. Further, the numerical value to be counted does not necessarily have to be continuously counted.

There may be a plurality of types of effect modes of the counting effect (color of numerical value, counting speed, font of numerical value, initial value of numerical value, display position of numerical value, etc.). Further, the effect mode (color of numerical value, etc.) may be changed during the counting effect. Then, the ratio of the specific value, the reliability of the jackpot, the ratio of the super reach, and the like may be different depending on the effect mode of the counting effect. Further, the set value may be suggested depending on the effect mode of the counting effect. For example, red and white may be provided as numerical colors so that red is easier to reach a specific value (more likely to be a big hit) than white. Further, the red color may have a higher accuracy of the set value suggested when the counting effect ends in the middle than the white color. Further, a plurality of counting speeds may be provided, and the ratio of reaching a specific value (a big hit) may be different depending on the counting speed. Further, the accuracy of the set value suggested when the counting effect ends in the middle may be different depending on the counting speed. By doing so, it is possible to draw more attention to the counting effect.

Further, the counting effect may be executed in which the counting is temporarily suspended and then the counting is restarted. For example, if another effect (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) is executed during the execution of the counting effect, the counting effect (counting) is interrupted during the execution period of the other effect, and the other effect is performed. After the end, the counting effect (counting) may be restarted.

Further, in the above embodiment, the counting effect is an effect showing the expectation degree of the variable display (the change notice advance notice effect), but is an effect showing the expectation degree of the variable display before execution (look-ahead notice effect). May be good. Further, the counting effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. The counting effect may be executed in the big hit game state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the specific effect is an effect indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high (a effect suggesting that the big hit is achieved), but any effect may be used as long as it is an effect suggesting that it is advantageous for the player. For example, a staging that suggests that it is an advantageous jackpot type (a staging that suggests the number of rounds when a jackpot is reached and whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot), or a staging state when the gaming state is not notified. It may be a production or the like that suggests. Further, when the counting effect is executed in the big hit game state, it may be an effect that suggests the number of rounds of the big hit or an effect that indicates promotion to a probabilistic big hit. In a gaming machine that can be controlled to a probabilistic state based on the entry of a gaming ball into a specific area in the large winning opening, it may be an effect indicating that the gaming ball has entered a specific area.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 110AK)
As a pachinko gaming machine in which a set value can be set, for example, those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have been proposed. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, it is possible to carry out an effect of suggesting a set value.
In such a gaming machine, there was room for improvement in the production method.
The gaming machine according to the feature unit 110AK is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the production is improved and the interest of the game is improved.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 110AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Setting means that can be set to any setting value (for example, any of setting values 1 to 3) among a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13, etc.) )When,
Numerical value display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a counting effect) that changes and displays a numerical value, and
A specific effect executing means (for example, an effect for executing a specific effect) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, FIG. 11-11 (G)) when the numerical value displayed by the numerical value display means becomes a specific value (for example, “0”). With a control CPU 120)
The numerical display means is
When the display of the numerical value is finished after the numerical value is changed to the specific value (for example, FIG. 11-11), and when the display of the numerical value is finished before the numerical value is changed to the specific value (for example, FIG. 11-12). And there is
The more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the ratio of ending the display of the numerical value before changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, the higher the set value in 110AKS003, the higher the counting value "0". It is difficult to determine).
With such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The more advantageous the set value is to the player, the easier it is for the numerical value display means to display the numerical value (for example, the higher the set value in 110AKS001, the easier it is to determine to execute the counting effect). You may do so.
With such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
When the numerical value is displayed by the numerical value display means, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the ratio of ending the display of the numerical value at the stage where the change is small (for example, the set value in 110AKS003). The higher the value, the easier it is to determine a higher count value).
With such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
There may be a plurality of types of numerical display modes by the numerical display means.
With such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
There may be a plurality of types of numerical value change rates by the numerical value display means.
With such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
The numerical value display means may be able to temporarily hide the numerical value when the numerical value is changed and displayed.
With such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 4A, 4B special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker , 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning openings, 11 main board, 12
Production control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay board, 20 ordinary symbol display, 21 gate switch, 22A, 22B start port switch, 23 count switch, 30 ball hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push Button, 32 movable body, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104, 124 random number circuit, 105, 125 I / O, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Game control means to control the game,
Setting permission status control means that can control the setting permission status for setting the setting value, and
Setting confirmation status control means that can control the setting confirmation status for confirming the set value, and
A plurality of light emitting means controlled by the game control means and showing a display result of a variable display according to a plurality of light emitting modes, and a plurality of light emitting means.
Specific display means that can display specific display, and
A specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect in relation to the specific display displayed by the specific display means, and a specific effect means.
Equipped with
The plurality of light emitting means
When the power failure is restored, the light emission mode shows the display result of the variable display shown before the power failure recovery.
In the setting permission state , it is a light emitting mode that is not normally used during a game, and is a special light emitting mode in which all of the plurality of light emitting means emit light .
After the end of the setting permission state, the light emission mode shows the same contents as the display result of the variable display shown after the power failure recovery.
In the setting confirmation state, the special light emission mode is common to that in the setting permission state.
The specific staging means includes a first staging means and a second staging means.
As the specific effect, either a first specific effect using the first effect means or a second specific effect using the second effect means can be executed according to the ratio controlled to the advantageous state. And
When the specific effect using one of the first effect means and the second effect means is executed in relation to one specific display, the first effect means and the said in relation to the other specific display. Restricting the execution of the specific effect using the other of the second effect means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images